View ST90135_43564.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

ST90158 - ST90135
8/16-BIT MCU FAMILY WITH UP TO 64K ROM/OTP/EPROM AND UP TO 2K RAM
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s s
s
s s s
s s
s
s
s
s s
Register File based 8/16 bit Core Architecture with RUN, WFI, SLOW and HALT modes 0 - 16 MHz Operation @ 5V10%, -40C to +85C and 0C to +70C Operating Temperature Ranges 0 - 14 MHz Operation @ 3V10% and 0C to +70C Operating Temperature Range Fully Programmable PLL Clock Generator, with Frequency Multiplication and low frequency, low cost external crystal Minimum 8-bit Instruction Cycle time: 83ns - (@ 24 MHz internal clock frequency) Minimum 16-bit Instruction Cycle time: 250ns (@ 24 MHz internal clock frequency) Internal Memory: - EPROM/OTP/ROM 16/24/32/48/64K bytes - ROMless version available - RAM 512/768/1K/1.5K/2K bytes Maximum External Memory: 64K bytes 224 general purpose registers available as RAM, accumulators or index pointers (register file) 80-pin Plastic Quad Flat Package and 80-pin Thin Quad Flat Package 67 fully programmable I/O bits 8 external and 1 Non-Maskable Interrupts DMA Controller and Programmable Interrupt Handler Single Master Serial Peripheral Interface Two 16-bit Timers with 8-bit Prescaler, one usable as a Watchdog Timer (software and hardware) Three (ST90158) or two (ST90135) 16-bit Multifunction Timers, each with an 8 bit prescaler, 12 operating modes and DMA capabilities 8 channel 8-bit Analog to Digital Converter, with Automatic voltage monitoring capabilities and external reference inputs Two (ST90158) or one (ST90135) Serial Communication Interfaces with asynchronous, synchronous and DMA capabilities Rich Instruction Set with 14 Addressing modes Division-by-Zero trap generation
TQFP80
PQFP80 Versatile Development Tools, including Assembler, Linker, C-compiler, Archiver, Source Level Debugger and Hardware Emulators with Real-Time Operating System available from Third Parties DEVICE SUMMARY
s
DEVICE
Program RAM Memory MFT SCI PACKAGE (Bytes) (Bytes) 16K ROM 512 768 1K 1.5K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 PQFP80/ TQFP80 CQFP80 CQFP80 PQFP80 PQFP80/ TQFP80/ PQFP80/ TQFP80 PQFP80 24K ROM 32K ROM 48K ROM
ST90135
ST90158 ST90E158
64k ROM
64K EPROM 64K ST90E158LV EPROM ST90T158 64K OTP ST90T158LV 64K OTP ST90R158 ROMless
Rev. 3.0
January 2000 1/190
9
Table of Contents
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.1.1 ST9+ Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.1.2 Power Saving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.1.3 system Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.1.4 I/O Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.1.5 Multifunction Timers (MFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1.6 Standard Timer (STIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1.7 Watchdog Timer (WDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1.9 Serial Communications Controllers (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1.10 Analog/Digital Converter (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2 PIN DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.3 I/O PORT PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2 DEVICE ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.1 CORE ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.2 MEMORY SPACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.2.1 Register File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.2.2 Register Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.3 SYSTEM REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2.3.1 Central Interrupt Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2.3.2 Flag Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2.3.3 Register Pointing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2.3.4 Paged Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.3.5 Mode Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.3.6 Stack Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2.4 MEMORY ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 2.5 MEMORY MANAGEMENT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 2.6 ADDRESS SPACE EXTENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 2.6.1 Addressing 16-Kbyte Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 2.6.2 Addressing 64-Kbyte Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2.7 MMU REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2.7.1 DPR[3:0]: Data Page Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2.7.2 CSR: Code Segment Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 2.7.3 ISR: Interrupt Segment Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 2.7.4 DMASR: DMA Segment Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 2.8 MMU USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2.8.1 Normal Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2.8.2 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2.8.3 DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3 REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.1 MEMORY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.2 EPROM PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.3 MEMORY MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.4 ST90158/135 REGISTER MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 190 4 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 4.2 INTERRUPT VECTORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2/190
9
Table of Contents
4.2.1 Divide by Zero trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Segment Paging During Interrupt Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 PRIORITY LEVEL ARBITRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Priority level 7 (Lowest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Maximum depth of nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Simultaneous Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Dynamic Priority Level Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 ARBITRATION MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Concurrent Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Nested Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 TOP LEVEL INTERRUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 ON-CHIP PERIPHERAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 INTERRUPT RESPONSE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 INTERRUPT REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 DMA PRIORITY LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 DMA TRANSACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 DMA CYCLE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 SWAP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 DMA REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 CLOCK CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Clock Control Unit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 CLOCK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 PLL Clock Multiplier Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 CPU Clock Prescaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Peripheral Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.4 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.5 Interrupt Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 OSCILLATOR CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 RESET/STOP MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 RESET Pin Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 EXTERNAL STOP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 AS: Address Strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 DS: Data Strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.3 DS2: Data Strobe 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.4 RW: Read/Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.5 BREQ, BACK: Bus Request, Bus Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.6 PORT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 49 49 49 49 49 49 50 50 50 53 55 57 57 58 59 63 63 63 64 66 66 67 68 68 68 68 69 70 70 70 71 71 74 77 79 80 80 81 81 82 82 82 82 85 85 86
3/190
9
Table of Contents
7.2.7 PORT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.2.8 WAIT: External Memory Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.3 REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 8 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 8.2 SPECIFIC PORT CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 8.3 PORT CONTROL REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 8.4 INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 8.5 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 8.5.1 Pin Declared as I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 8.5.2 Pin Declared as an Alternate Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 8.5.3 Pin Declared as an Alternate Function Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 8.6 I/O STATUS AFTER WFI, HALT AND RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 9 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 9.1 TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 9.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 9.1.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 9.1.3 Watchdog Timer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 9.1.4 WDT Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 9.1.5 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 9.2 MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 9.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 9.2.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 9.2.3 Input Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 9.2.4 Output Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 9.2.5 Interrupt and DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 9.2.6 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 9.3 STANDARD TIMER (STIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 9.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 9.3.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 9.3.3 Interrupt Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 9.3.4 Register Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 9.3.5 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 9.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 9.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 9.4.2 Device-Specific Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 9.4.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 9.4.4 Interrupt Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 9.4.5 Working With Other Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 9.4.6 I2C-bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 9.4.7 S-Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 9.4.8 IM-bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 9.4.9 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 9.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 9.5.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 9.5.3 SCI Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.5.4 Serial Frame Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4/190
1
Table of Contents
9.5.5 Clocks And Serial Transmission Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.6 SCI Initialization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.7 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.8 Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.9 Interrupts and DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.10 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.3 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.4 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 80-PIN PLASTIC QUAD FLAT PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 149 151 151 152 155 166 166 167 169 170 174 188 188 188 189
5/190
1
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION The ST90158 and ST90135 microcontrollers are developed and manufactured by STMicroelectronics using a proprietary n-well CMOS process. Their performance derives from the use of a flexible 256-register programming model for ultra-fast context switching and real-time event response. The intelligent on-chip peripherals offload the ST9 core from I/O and data management processing tasks allowing critical application tasks to get the maximum use of core resources. The new-generation ST9 MCU devices now also support low power consumption and low voltage operation for power-efficient and low-cost embedded systems. 1.1.1 ST9+ Core The advanced Core consists of the Central Processing Unit (CPU), the Register File, the Interrupt and DMA controller, and the Memory Management Unit. The MMU allows addressing of up to 4 Megabytes of program and data mapped into a single linear space. Four independent buses are controlled by the Core: a 16-bit memory bus, an 8-bit register data bus, an 8-bit register address bus and a 6-bit interrupt/DMA bus which connects the interrupt and DMA controllers in the on-chip peripherals with the core. This multiple bus architecture makes the ST9 family devices highly efficient for accessing on and offchip memory and fast exchange of data with the on-chip peripherals. The general-purpose registers can be used as accumulators, index registers, or address pointers. Adjacent register pairs make up 16-bit registers for addressing or 16-bit processing. Although the ST9 has an 8-bit ALU, the chip handles 16-bit operations, including arithmetic, loads/stores, and memory/register and memory/memory exchanges. 1.1.2 Power Saving Modes To optimize performance versus power consumption, a range of operating modes can be dynamically selected. Run Mode. This is the full speed execution mode with CPU and peripherals running at the maximum clock speed delivered by the Phase Locked Loop (PLL) of the Clock Control Unit (CCU). Slow Mode. Power consumption can be significantly reduced by running the CPU and the peripherals at reduced clock speed using the CPU Prescaler and CCU Clock Divider (PLL not used) or by using the CK_AF external clock. Wait For Interrupt Mode. The Wait For Interrupt (WFI) instruction suspends program execution until an interrupt request is acknowledged. During WFI, the CPU clock is halted while the peripheral and interrupt controller keep running at a frequency programmable via the CCU. In this mode, the power consumption of the device can be reduced by more than 95% (Low Power WFI). Halt Mode. When executing the HALT instruction, and if the Watchdog is not enabled, the CPU and its peripherals stop operating and the status of the machine remains frozen (the clock is also stopped). A reset is necessary to exit from Halt mode. 1.1.3 system Clock A programmable PLL Clock Generator allows standard 3 to 5 MHz crystals to be used to obtain a large range of internal frequencies up to 24 MHz. 1.1.4 I/O Ports The I/O lines are grouped into up to nine 8-bit I/O Ports and can be configured on a bit basis to provide timing, status signals, an address/data bus for interfacing to external memory, timer inputs and outputs, analog inputs, external interrupts and serial or parallel I/O.
6/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1.5 Multifunction Timers (MFT) Each multifunction timer has a 16-bit Up/Down counter supported by two 16-bit Compare registers and two 16-bit input capture registers. Timing resolution can be programmed using an 8-bit prescaler. Multibyte transfers between the peripheral and memory are supported by two DMA channels. 1.1.6 Standard Timer (STIM) The Standard Timer includes a programmable 16bit down counter and an associated 8-bit prescaler with Single and Continuous counting modes. 1.1.7 Watchdog Timer (WDT) The Watchdog timer can be used to monitor system integrity. When enabled, it generates a reset after a timeout period unless the counter is refreshed by the application software. For additional
security, watchdog function can be enabled by hardware using a specific pin. 1.1.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) The SPI bus is used to communicate with external devices via the SPI, or I C bus communication standards. The SPI uses one or two lines for serial data and a synchronous clock signal. 1.1.9 Serial Communications Controllers (SCI) Each SCI provides a synchronous or asynchronous serial I/O port using two DMA channels. Baud rates and data formats are programmable. 1.1.10 Analog/Digital Converter (ADC) The ADCs provide up to 8 analog inputs with onchip sample and hold. The analog watchdog generates an interrupt when the input voltage moves out of a preset threshold.
7/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 1. ST90158 Block Diagram
ADDRESS DATA
Port0 EPROM/ ROM/OT P up to 64 Kbytes
P0[7:0]
ADDRE SS
Port1
P1[7:0] P0[7:0] P1[7:0] P2[6:0] P4[7:0] P5[7:3], P5.1 P6[6:0] P7[7:0] P8[7:0] P9[7:4], P9[2:0]
RAM up to 2 Kbytes
Fully Prog.
256 bytes Register File 8/16 bits CPU Interrupt Management ST9+ CORE
MEMORY BUS
AS WAIT NMI R/W DS
I/Os
STIM
STOUT
INT0-7
OSCIN OSCOUT RESET INTCLK CKAF
SPI I2C/IM Bus
SDI SDO SCK
RCCU REGISTER BUS A/D Converter with analog watchdog
WDIN WDOUT HW0SW1 T0OUTA T0OUTB T0INA T0INB T1OUTA T1OUTB T1INA T1INB T3OUTA T3OUTB T3INA T3INB
EXTRG AIN[7:0] TX0CKIN RX0CKIN S0IN DCD0 S0OUT CLK0OUT RTS0 TX1CKIN RX1CKIN S1IN DCD1 S1OUT CLK1OUT RTS1
WATCHDOG
MFT0
SCI0
MFT1 SCI1 MFT3
All alternate functions (Italic characters) are mapped on Port2 through Port9
8/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 2. ST90135 Block Diagram
ADDRESS DATA
ROM up to 32 Kbytes
Port0
P0[7:0]
ADDRESS
Port1 RAM up to 1 Kbyte
Fully Prog.
P1[7:0] P0[7:0] P1[7:0] P2[6:0] P4[7:0] P5[7:3], P5.1 P6[6:0] P7[7:0] P8[7:0] P9[7:4], P9[2:0]
256 bytes Register File 8/16 bits CPU Interrupt Management ST9+ CORE
MEMORY BUS
AS WAIT NMI R/W DS
I/Os
STIM
STOUT
INT0-7
OSCIN OSCOUT RESET INTCLK CKAF
SPI I2C/IM Bus
SDI SDO SCK
RCCU REGISTER BUS A/D Converter with analog watchdog SCI0
WDIN WDOUT HW0SW1 T1OUTA T1OUTB T1INA T1INB T3OUTA T3OUTB T3INA T3INB
EXTRG AIN[7:0] TX0CKIN RX0CKIN S0IN DCD0 S0OUT CLK0OUT RTS0
WATCHDOG
MFT1
MFT3
All alternate functions (Italic characters) are mapped on Port2 through Port9
9/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.2 PIN DESCRIPTION AS: Address Strobe (output, active low, 3-state). Address Strobe is pulsed low once at the beginning of each memory cycle. The rising edge of AS indicates that address, Read/Write (R/W), and Data Memory signals are valid for memory transfers. Under program control, AS can be placed in a high-impedance state along with Port 0, Port 1 and Data Strobe (DS). DS: Data Strobe (output, active low, 3-state). Data Strobe provides the timing for data movement to or from Port 0 for each memory transfer. During a write cycle, data out is valid at the leading edge of DS. During a read cycle, Data In must be valid prior to the trailing edge of DS. When the ST90158 accesses on-chip memory, DS is held high during the whole memory cycle. It can be placed in a high impedance state along with Port 0, Port 1 and AS. RESET: Reset (input, active low). The ST9+ is initialised by the Reset signal. With the deactivation of RESET, program execution begins from the memory location pointed to by the vector contained in memory locations 00h and 01h. R/W: Read/Write (output, 3-state). Read/Write determines the direction of data transfer for external memory transactions. R/W is low when writing to external memory, and high for all other transactions. It can be placed in high impedance state along with Port 0, Port 1, AS and DS. OSCIN, OSCOUT: Oscillator (input and output). These pins connect a parallel-resonant crystal (3 to 5 MHz), or an external source to the on-chip clock oscillator and buffer. OSCIN is the input of the oscillator inverter and internal clock generator; OSCOUT is the output of the oscillator inverter. HW0_SW1: When connected to VDD through a 1K pull-up resistor, the software watchdog option is selected. When connected to VSS through a 1K pull-down resistor, the hardware watchdog option is selected. VPP: Programming voltage for EPROM/OTP devices. Must be connected to VSS in user mode through a 10 Kohm resistor. AVDD: Analog VDD of the Analog to Digital Converter. AVSS: Analog VSS of the Analog to Digital Converter. VDD: Main Power Supply Voltage (5V 10%). VSS: Digital Circuit Ground. P0[7:0], P1[7:0]: (Input/Output, TTL or CMOS compatible). 16 lines grouped into I/O ports providing the external memory interface for addressing 64Kbytes of external memory. P0[7:0], P1[7:0], P2[6:0], P4[7:0], P5[7:3], P5.1, P6[6:0], P7[7:0], P8[7:0], P9[7:4], P9[2:0]: I/O Port Lines (Input/Output, TTL or CMOS compatible). I/O lines grouped into I/O ports of 8 bits, bit programmable under program control as general purpose I/O or as alternate functions.
10/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont'd) Figure 3. 80-Pin TQFP Pin-out
AD6/P0.6 VSS AD7/P0.7 VDD AS DS VPP * P4.0 P4.1 INTCLK/P4.2 STOUT/P4.3 WDOUT/I NT0/P4.4 INT4/P4.5 T0OUTB/INT5 /P4.6 T0OUTA/P4.7 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4
80 1
P0.5/AD5 P0.4/AD4 P0.3/AD3 P0.2/AD2 P0.1/AD1 P0.0/AD0 P6.6 P6.5/RW P6.4 P6.3 P6.2 P6.1 P6.0 P1.7/A15 P1.6/A14 P1.5/A13 P1.4/A12 P1.3/A11 P1.2/A10 P1.1/A9 61 60
ST90158/ST90135
20 21
41 40
P1.0/A8 RESET OSCIN VSS OSCOUT P5.1/SDI HW0SW1 P5.3 P5.4/T1OUTA/DCD0 P5.5/T1OUT1/RTS0 P5.6/T3OUTA/DCD1 P5.7/T3OUTB/RTS1/CKAF VD D P8.0/T3INA P8.1/T1INB P8.2/INT1/T1OUTA P8.3/INT3/T1OUTB P8.4/T1INA/WA IT/WDOUT P8.5/T3INB P8.6/INT7/T3OUTA
P2.5 P2.6 S1OUT/P9.0 T0OUTB/S1IN/P9.1 TX1CKIN/CLK1OUT/P9.2 S0OUT/RX1CKIN/P9.4 S0IN/P9.5 INT2/SCK/P9.6 INT6/SDO/P9.7 AIN0/RX0CKIN/WDIN/EXTRG/P7.0 AIN1/T0INB/SDI/P7.1 AIN2/CLK0OUT/TX0CKIN/P7.2 AIN3/T0INA/P7.3 AIN4/P7.4 AIN5/P7.5 AIN6/P7.6 AIN7/P7.7 AVDD AVSS NMI/T3OUTB/P8.7
*EPROM or OTP devices only
11/190
1
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont'd) Figure 4. 80-Pin PQFP Pin-Out
P0.3/AD3 P0.2/AD2 P0.1/AD1 P0.0/AD0 P6.6 P6.5/RW P6.4 P6.3 P6.2 P6.1 P6.0 P1.7/A15 P1.6/A14 P1.5/A13 P1.4/A12 P1.3/A11 AD4/P0.4 AD5/P0.5 AD6/P0.6 VSS AD7/P0.7 VDD AS DS VPP* P4.0 P4.1 INTCLK/P4.2 STOUT/P4.3 INT0/WDOUT/P4.4 INT4/P4.5 INT5/T0OUTB/P4.6 T0OUTA/P4.7 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 1 80 64
ST90158/ST90135
24
40
P1.2/A10 P1.1/A9 P1.0/A8 RESET OSCIN VSS OSCOUT P5.1/SDI HW0SW1 P5.3 P5.4/T1OUTA/DCD0 P5.5/T1OUTB/RTS0 P5.6/T3OUTA/DCD1 P5.7/T3OUTB/RTS1/CK_AF VDD P8.0/T3INA P8.1/T1INB P8.2/T1OUTA/INT1 P8.3/T1OUTB/INT3 P8.4/T1INA/WAIT/WDOUT P8.5/T3INB P8.6/INT7/T3OUTA P8.7/NMI/T3OUTB AVSS
S1OUT/P9.0 T0OUTB/S1IN/P9.1 TX1CKIN/CLK1OUT/P9.2 S0OUT/RX1CKIN/P9.4 S0IN/P9.5 INT2/SCK/P9.6 INT6/SDO/P9.7 AIN0/RX0CKIN/WDIN/EXTRG/P7.0 AIN1/T0INB/P7.1 AIN2/CLK0OUT/TX0CKIN/P7.2 AIN3/T0INA/P7.3 AIN4/P7.4 AIN5/P7.5 AIN6/P7.6 AIN7/P7.7 AVDD 12/190
*EPROM or OTP devices only
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.3 I/O PORT PINS All the ports of the device can be programmed as Input/Output or in Input mode, compatible with TTL or CMOS levels (except where Schmitt Trigger is present). Each bit can be programmed individually (Refer to the I/O ports chapter). TTL/CMOS Input For all those port bits where no input schmitt trigger is implemented, it is always possible to program the input level as TTL or CMOS compatible by programming the relevant PxC2.n control bit. Refer to the section titled "Input/Output Bit Configuration" in the I/O Ports Chapter . Table 1. I/O Port Characteristics
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 Input TTL/CMOS TTL/CMOS TTL/CMOS Schmitt trigger Schmitt trigger TTL/CMOS Schmitt trigger Schmitt trigger Schmitt trigger Output Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Push-Pull/OD Weak Pull-Up Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Reset State Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional WPU WPU WPU WPU WPU WPU WPU
Push-Pull/OD Output The output buffer can be programmed as pushpull or open-drain: attention must be paid to the fact that the open-drain option corresponds only to a disabling of P-channel MOS transistor of the buffer itself: it is still present and physically connected to the pin. Consequently it is not possible to increase the output voltage on the pin over VDD+0.3 Volt, to avoid direct junction biasing.
Legend: WPU = Weak Pull-Up, OD = Open Drain
13/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I/O PORT PINS (Cont'd) How to Configure the I/O ports To configure the I/O ports, use the information in Table 1, Table 2 and the Port Bit Configuration Table in the I/O ports Chapter (See page 92). Input Note = the hardware characteristics fixed for each port line in Table 1. - If Input note = TTL/CMOS, either TTL or CMOS input level can be selected by software. - If Input note = Schmitt trigger, selecting CMOS or TTL input by software has no effect, the input will always be Schmitt Trigger. Alternate Functions (AF) = More than one AF cannot be assigned to an I/O pin at the same time: An alternate function can be selected as follows. AF Inputs: - AF is selected implicitly by enabling the corresponding peripheral. Exception to this are A/D inputs which must be explicitly selected as AF by software. AF Outputs or Bidirectional Lines: - In the case of Outputs or I/Os, AF is selected explicitly by software. Example 1: SCI data input AF: S0IN, Port: P9.5, Port Style: Input Schmitt Trigger. Write the port configuration bits: P9C2.5=1 P9C1.5=0 P9C0.5=1 Enable the SCI peripheral by software as described in the SCI chapter. Example 2: SCI data output AF: S0OUT, Port: P9.4 Output push-pull (configured by software). Write the port configuration bits: P9C2.4=0 P9C1.4=1 P9C0.4=1 Example 3: ADC data input AF: AIN0, Port : P7.0, Input Note: does not apply to ADC Write the port configuration bits: P7C2.0=1 P7C1.0=1 P7C0.0=1 Example 4: External Memory I/O AF: AD0, Port : P0.0 Write the port configuration bits: P0C2.0=0 P0C1.0=1 P0C0.0=1
Table 2. I/O Port Description and Alternate Functions
Pin No. PQFP TQFP Alternate Functions
Port Name
General Purpose I/O
P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 All ports useable for general purpose I/O (input, output or bidirectional)
75 77 AD0 76 78 AD1 77 79 AD2 78 80 AD3 79 80 1 3 1 2 3 5 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7
I/O Address/Data bit 0 mux I/O Address/Data bit 1 mux I/O Address/Data bit 2 mux I/O Address/Data bit 3 mux I/O Address/Data bit 4 mux I/O Address/Data bit 5 mux I/O Address/Data bit 6 mux I/O Address/Data bit 7 mux I/O Address bit 8 I/O Address bit 9 I/O Address bit 10
60 62 A8 61 63 A9 62 64 A10
14/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Port Name
P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P4.0 P4.1 P4.2 P4.3 P4.4 P4.5 P4.6 P4.7 P5.1 P5.3 P5.4
63 65 A11 64 66 A12 65 67 A13 66 68 A14 67 69 A15 16 18 17 19 18 20 19 21 20 22 21 23 22 24 8 9 10 11
PQFP
TQFP
General Purpose I/O
Pin No. Alternate Functions
I/O Address bit 11 I/O Address bit 12 I/O Address bit 13 I/O Address bit 14 I/O Address bit 15 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O Internal main Clock O Standard Timer Output I External Interrupt 0
10 12 INTCLK All ports useable 11 13 STOUT for general purINT0 pose I/O (input, 12 14 WDOUT output or bidirectional) 13 15 INT4 14 16 INT5 T0OUTB
O Watchdog Timer output I I External interrupt 4 External Interrupt 5
O MF Timer 0 Output B 1) O MF Timer 0 Output A 1) I I/O SPI Serial Data In
15 17 T0OUTA 55 57 SDI 53 55 52 54 T1OUTA DCD0 RTS0 T1OUTB T3OUTA DCD1 RTS1
O MF Timer 1 output A I SCI0 Data Carrier Detect
P5.5
51 53
O SCI0 Request to Send O MF Timer 1 output B O MF Timer 3 output A I SCI1 Data Carrier Detect 1) O SCI1 Request to Send 1) O MF Timer 3 output B I I/O External Clock Input
P5.6
50 52
P5.7
49 51 T3OUTB CK_AF
P6.0
68 70
15/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Port Name
P6.1 P6.2 P6.3 P6.4 P6.5 P6.6
69 71 70 72 71 73 72 74 73 75 R/W 74 76 AIN0
PQFP
TQFP
General Purpose I/O
Pin No. Alternate Functions
I/O I/O I/O I/O O Read/Write I/O I I I I I I I I A/D Analog input 0 SCI0 Receive Clock input T/WD input A/D External Trigger A/D Analog input 1 MF Timer 0 input B 1) SPI Serial Data In A/D Analog input 2
P7.0
30 32
RX0CKIN WDIN EXTRG AIN1
P7.1
31 33 T0INB SDI AIN2
P7.2
32 34 CLK0OUT O SCI0 Byte Sync Clock output TX0CKIN I I I I I I I I I I SCI0 Transmit Clock input A/D Analog input 3 MF Timer 0 input A 1) A/D Analog input 4 A/D Analog input 5 A/D Analog input 6 A/D Analog input 7 MF Timer 3 input A MF Timer 1 input B External interrupt 1
P7.3 P7.4 P7.5 P7.6 P7.7 P8.0 P8.1 P8.2
AIN3 All ports useable 33 35 for general purT0INA pose I/O (input, output or bidirec- 34 36 AIN4 tional) 35 37 AIN5 36 38 AIN6 37 39 AIN7 47 49 T3INA 46 48 T1INB 45 47 INT1 T1OUTA INT3 T1OUTB T1INA
O MF Timer 1 output A I External interrupt 3
P8.3
44 46
O MF Timer 1 output B I I MF Timer 1 input A External Wait input
P8.4
43 45 WAIT WDOUT
O Watchdog Timer output I I MF Timer 3 input B External interrupt 7
P8.5 P8.6
42 44 T3INB 41 43 INT7 T3OUTA NMI T3OUTB
O MF Timer 3 output A I Non-Maskable Interrupt
P8.7
40 42
O MF Timer 3 output B
16/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Port Name
PQFP
TQFP
General Purpose I/O
Pin No. Alternate Functions
P9.0 P9.1
23 25 S1OUT 24 26 T0OUTB S1IN
O SCI1 Serial Output 1) O MF Timer 0 output B 1) I SCI1 Serial Input 1) SCI1 Transmit Clock input 1)
P9.2
25 27 All ports useable for general purpose I/O (input, 26 28 output or bidirectional) 27 29 28 30
CLK1OUT O SCI1 Byte Sync Clock output 1) TX1CKIN S0OUT RX1CKIN S0IN INT2 SCK INT6 SDO I
P9.4 P9.5 P9.6
O SCI0 Serial Output O SCI1 Receive Clock input 1) I I SCI0 Serial Input External interrupt 2
O SPI Serial Clock I External interrupt 6
P9.7
29 31
O SPI Serial Data Out
Note 1) Not present on ST90135
17/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2 DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.1 CORE ARCHITECTURE The ST9+ Core or Central Processing Unit (CPU) features a highly optimised instruction set, capable of handling bit, byte (8-bit) and word (16-bit) data, as well as BCD and Boolean formats; 14 addressing modes are available. Four independent buses are controlled by the Core: a 16-bit Memory bus, an 8-bit Register data bus, an 8-bit Register address bus and a 6-bit Interrupt/DMA bus which connects the interrupt and DMA controllers in the on-chip peripherals with the Core. This multiple bus architecture affords a high degree of pipelining and parallel operation, thus making the ST9+ family devices highly efficient, both for numerical calculation, data handling and with regard to communication with on-chip peripheral resources. which hold data and control bits for the on-chip peripherals and I/Os. - A single linear memory space accommodating both program and data. All of the physically separate memory areas, including the internal ROM, internal RAM and external memory are mapped in this common address space. The total addressable memory space of 4 Mbytes (limited by the size of on-chip memory and the number of external address pins) is arranged as 64 segments of 64 Kbytes. Each segment is further subdivided into four pages of 16 Kbytes, as illustrated in Figure 5. A Memory Management Unit uses a set of pointer registers to address a 22-bit memory field using 16-bit address-based instructions. 2.2.1 Register File The Register File consists of (see Figure 6): 2.2 MEMORY SPACES - 224 general purpose registers (Group 0 to D, There are two separate memory spaces: registers R0 to R223) - The Register File, which comprises 240 8-bit - 6 system registers in the System Group (Group registers, arranged as 15 groups (Group 0 to E), E, registers R224 to R239) each containing sixteen 8-bit registers plus up to - Up to 64 pages, depending on device configura64 pages of 16 registers mapped in Group F, tion, each containing up to 16 registers, mapped to Group F (R240 to R255), see Figure 7. Figure 5. Single Program and Data Memory Address Space
Address
3FFFFFh 3F0000h 3EFFFFh 3E0000h
Data 16K Pages
255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247
Code 64K Segments
63
62
up to 4 Mbytes
135 134 133 132
21FFFFh 210000h 20FFFFh
Reserved
33
02FFFFh 020000h 01FFFFh 010000h 00FFFFh 000000h
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2
1
0
18/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MEMORY SPACES (Cont'd) Figure 6. Register Groups
UP TO 64 PAGES
Figure 7. Page Pointer for Group F mapping
PAGE 63
255 240 F PAGED REGISTERS 239 E SYSTEM REGISTERS 224 223 D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 15 0
PAGE 5 R255 PAGE 0
R240 R234 224 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTERS R224 PAGE POINTER
VA00432
R0
VA00433
Figure 8. Addressing the Register File
REGISTER FILE 255 240 F PAGED REGISTERS 239 E SYSTEM REGISTERS 224 223 D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 15 0
VR000118
GROUP D R195 (R0C3h) R207
(1100) (0011) GROUP C
R195 R192 GROUP B
19/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MEMORY SPACES (Cont'd) 2.2.2 Register Addressing Register File registers, including Group F paged registers (but excluding Group D), may be addressed explicitly by means of a decimal, hexadecimal or binary address; thus R231, RE7h and R11100111b represent the same register (see Figure 8). Group D registers can only be addressed in Working Register mode. Note that an upper case "R" is used to denote this direct addressing mode. Working Registers Certain types of instruction require that registers be specified in the form "rx", where x is in the range 0 to 15: these are known as Working Registers. Note that a lower case "r" is used to denote this indirect addressing mode. Two addressing schemes are available: a single group of 16 working registers, or two separately mapped groups, each consisting of 8 working registers. These groups may be mapped starting at any 8 or 16 byte boundary in the register file by means of dedicated pointer registers. This technique is described in more detail in Section 2.3.3 Register Pointing Techniques, and illustrated in Figure 9 and in Figure 10. System Registers The 16 registers in Group E (R224 to R239) are System registers and may be addressed using any of the register addressing modes. These registers are described in greater detail in Section 2.3 SYSTEM REGISTERS. Paged Registers Up to 64 pages, each containing 16 registers, may be mapped to Group F. These are addressed using any register addressing mode, in conjunction with the Page Pointer register, R234, which is one of the System registers. This register selects the page to be mapped to Group F and, once set, does not need to be changed if two or more registers on the same page are to be addressed in succession.
Therefore if the Page Pointer, R234, is set to 5, the instructions: spp #5 ld R242, r4 will load the contents of working register r4 into the third register of page 5 (R242). These paged registers hold data and control information relating to the on-chip peripherals, each peripheral always being associated with the same pages and registers to ensure code compatibility between ST9+ devices. The number of these registers therefore depends on the peripherals which are present in the specific ST9+ family device. In other words, pages only exist if the relevant peripheral is present. Table 3. Register File Organization
Hex. Address F0-FF E0-EF D0-DF C0-CF B0-BF A0-AF 90-9F 80-8F 70-7F 60-6F 50-5F 40-4F 30-3F 20-2F 10-1F 00-0F Decimal Address 240-255 224-239 208-223 192-207 176-191 160-175 144-159 128-143 112-127 96-111 80-95 64-79 48-63 32-47 16-31 00-15 General Purpose Registers Function Paged Registers System Registers Register File Group Group F Group E Group D Group C Group B Group A Group 9 Group 8 Group 7 Group 6 Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 Group 0
20/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.3 SYSTEM REGISTERS The System registers are listed in Table 4. They are used to perform all the important system settings. Their purpose is described in the following pages. Refer to the chapter dealing with I/O for a description of the PORT[5:0] Data registers. Table 4. System Registers (Group E)
R239 (EFh) R238 (EEh) R237 (EDh) R236 (ECh) R235 (EBh) R234 (EAh) R233 (E9h) R232 (E8h) R231 (E7h) R230 (E6h) R229 (E5h) R228 (E4h) R227 (E3h) R226 (E2h) R225 (E1h) R224 (E0h) SSPLR SSPHR USPLR USPHR MODE REGISTER PAGE POINTER REGISTER REGISTER POINTER 1 REGISTER POINTER 0 FLAG REGISTER CENTRAL INT. CNTL REG PORT5 DATA REG. PORT4 DATA REG. PORT3 DATA REG. PORT2 DATA REG. PORT1 DATA REG. PORT0 DATA REG.
Note: If an MFT is not included in the ST9 device, then this bit has no effect. Bit 6 = TLIP: Top Level Interrupt Pending. This bit is set by hardware when a Top Level Interrupt Request is recognized. This bit can also be set by software to simulate a Top Level Interrupt Request. 0: No Top Level Interrupt pending 1: Top Level Interrupt pending Bit 5 = TLI: Top Level Interrupt bit. 0: Top Level Interrupt is acknowledged depending on the TLNM bit in the NICR Register. 1: Top Level Interrupt is acknowledged depending on the IEN and TLNM bits in the NICR Register (described in the Interrupt chapter). Bit 4 = IEN: Interrupt Enable . This bit is cleared by interrupt acknowledgement, and set by interrupt return (iret). IEN is modified implicitly by iret, ei and di instructions or by an interrupt acknowledge cycle. It can also be explicitly written by the user, but only when no interrupt is pending. Therefore, the user should execute a di instruction (or guarantee by other means that no interrupt request can arrive) before any write operation to the CICR register. 0: Disable all interrupts except Top Level Interrupt. 1: Enable Interrupts Bit 3 = IAM: Interrupt Arbitration Mode. This bit is set and cleared by software to select the arbitration mode. 0: Concurrent Mode 1: Nested Mode. Bit 2:0 = CPL[2:0]: Current Priority Level. These three bits record the priority level of the routine currently running (i.e. the Current Priority Level, CPL). The highest priority level is represented by 000, and the lowest by 111. The CPL bits can be set by hardware or software and provide the reference according to which subsequent interrupts are either left pending or are allowed to interrupt the current interrupt service routine. When the current interrupt is replaced by one of a higher priority, the current priority value is automatically stored until required in the NICR register.
2.3.1 Central Interrupt Control Register Please refer to the "INTERRUPT" chapter for a detailed description of the ST9 interrupt philosophy. CENTRAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (CICR) R230 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset Value: 1000 0111 (87h)
7 GCE TLIP N TLI IEN IAM 0 CPL2 CPL1 CPL0
Bit 7 = GCEN: Global Counter Enable. This bit is the Global Counter Enable of the Multifunction Timers. The GCEN bit is ANDed with the CE bit in the TCR Register (only in devices featuring the MFT Multifunction Timer) in order to enable the Timers when both bits are set. This bit is set after the Reset cycle.
21/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont'd) 2.3.2 Flag Register The Flag Register contains 8 flags which indicate the CPU status. During an interrupt, the flag register is automatically stored in the system stack area and recalled at the end of the interrupt service routine, thus returning the CPU to its original status. This occurs for all interrupts and, when operating in nested mode, up to seven versions of the flag register may be stored. FLAG REGISTER (FLAGR) R231- Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 C Z S V DA H 0 DP
decw), Test (tm, tmw, tcm, tcmw, btset). In most cases, the Zero flag is set when the contents of the register being used as an accumulator become zero, following one of the above operations. Bit 5 = S: Sign Flag. The Sign flag is affected by the same instructions as the Zero flag. The Sign flag is set when bit 7 (for a byte operation) or bit 15 (for a word operation) of the register used as an accumulator is one. Bit 4 = V: Overflow Flag. The Overflow flag is affected by the same instructions as the Zero and Sign flags. When set, the Overflow flag indicates that a two'scomplement number, in a result register, is in error, since it has exceeded the largest (or is less than the smallest), number that can be represented in two's-complement notation. Bit 3 = DA: Decimal Adjust Flag. The DA flag is used for BCD arithmetic. Since the algorithm for correcting BCD operations is different for addition and subtraction, this flag is used to specify which type of instruction was executed last, so that the subsequent Decimal Adjust (da) operation can perform its function correctly. The DA flag cannot normally be used as a test condition by the programmer. Bit 2 = H: Half Carry Flag. The H flag indicates a carry out of (or a borrow into) bit 3, as the result of adding or subtracting two 8-bit bytes, each representing two BCD digits. The H flag is used by the Decimal Adjust (da) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous addition or subtraction into the correct BCD result. Like the DA flag, this flag is not normally accessed by the user. Bit 1 = Reserved bit (must be 0). Bit 0 = DP: Data/Program Memory Flag. This bit indicates the memory area addressed. Its value is affected by the Set Data Memory (sdm) and Set Program Memory (spm) instructions. Refer to the Memory Management Unit for further details.
Bit 7 = C: Carry Flag. The carry flag is affected by: Addition (add, addw, adc, adcw), Subtraction (sub, subw, sbc, sbcw), Compare (cp, cpw), Shift Right Arithmetic (sra, sraw), Shift Left Arithmetic (sla, slaw), Swap Nibbles (swap), Rotate (rrc, rrcw, rlc, rlcw, ror, rol), Decimal Adjust (da), Multiply and Divide (mul, div, divws). When set, it generally indicates a carry out of the most significant bit position of the register being used as an accumulator (bit 7 for byte operations and bit 15 for word operations). The carry flag can be set by the Set Carry Flag (scf) instruction, cleared by the Reset Carry Flag (rcf) instruction, and complemented by the Complement Carry Flag (ccf) instruction. Bit 6 = Z: Zero Flag. The Zero flag is affected by: Addition (add, addw, adc, adcw), Subtraction (sub, subw, sbc, sbcw), Compare (cp, cpw), Shift Right Arithmetic (sra, sraw), Shift Left Arithmetic (sla, slaw), Swap Nibbles (swap), Rotate (rrc, rrcw, rlc, rlcw, ror, rol), Decimal Adjust (da), Multiply and Divide (mul, div, divws), Logical (and, andw, or, orw, xor, xorw, cpl), Increment and Decrement (inc, incw, dec,
22/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont'd) If the bit is set, data is accessed using the Data Pointers (DPRs registers), otherwise it is pointed to by the Code Pointer (CSR register); therefore, the user initialization routine must include a Sdm instruction. Note that code is always pointed to by the Code Pointer (CSR). Note: In the ST9+, the DP flag is only for compatibility with software developed for the first generation of ST9 devices. With the single memory addressing space, its use is now redundant. It must be kept to 1 with a Sdm instruction at the beginning of the program to ensure a normal use of the different memory pointers. 2.3.3 Register Pointing Techniques Two registers within the System register group, are used as pointers to the working registers. Register Pointer 0 (R232) may be used on its own as a single pointer to a 16-register working space, or in conjunction with Register Pointer 1 (R233), to point to two separate 8-register spaces. For the purpose of register pointing, the 16 register groups of the register file are subdivided into 32 8register blocks. The values specified with the Set Register Pointer instructions refer to the blocks to be pointed to in twin 8-register mode, or to the lower 8-register block location in single 16-register mode. The Set Register Pointer instructions srp, srp0 and srp1 automatically inform the CPU whether the Register File is to operate in single 16-register mode or in twin 8-register mode. The srp instruction selects the single 16-register group mode and
specifies the location of the lower 8-register block, while the srp0 and srp1 instructions automatically select the twin 8-register group mode and specify the locations of each 8-register block. There is no limitation on the order or position of these register groups, other than that they must start on an 8-register boundary in twin 8-register mode, or on a 16-register boundary in single 16register mode. The block number should always be an even number in single 16-register mode. The 16-register group will always start at the block whose number is the nearest even number equal to or lower than the block number specified in the srp instruction. Avoid using odd block numbers, since this can be confusing if twin mode is subsequently selected. Thus: srp #3 will be interpreted as srp #2 and will allow using R16 ..R31 as r0 .. r15. In single 16-register mode, the working registers are referred to as r0 to r15. In twin 8-register mode, registers r0 to r7 are in the block pointed to by RP0 (by means of the srp0 instruction), while registers r8 to r15 are in the block pointed to by RP1 (by means of the srp1 instruction). Caution: Group D registers can only be accessed as working registers using the Register Pointers, or by means of the Stack Pointers. They cannot be addressed explicitly in the form "Rxxx".
23/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont'd) POINTER 0 REGISTER (RP0) R232 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset Value: xxxx xx00 (xxh)
7 RG4 RG3 RG2 RG1 RG0 RPS 0 0 0
POINTER 1 REGISTER (RP1) R233 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset Value: xxxx xx00 (xxh)
7 RG4 RG3 RG2 RG1 RG0 RPS 0 0 0
Bit 7:3 = RG[4:0]: Register Group number. These bits contain the number (in the range 0 to 31) of the register block specified in the srp0 or srp instructions. In single 16-register mode the number indicates the lower of the two 8-register blocks to which the 16 working registers are to be mapped, while in twin 8-register mode it indicates the 8-register block to which r0 to r7 are to be mapped. Bit 2 = RPS: Register Pointer Selector. This bit is set by the instructions srp0 and srp1 to indicate that the twin register pointing mode is selected. The bit is reset by the srp instruction to indicate that the single register pointing mode is selected. 0: Single register pointing mode 1: Twin register pointing mode Bit 1:0: Reserved. Forced by hardware to zero.
This register is only used in the twin register pointing mode. When using the single register pointing mode, or when using only one of the twin register groups, the RP1 register must be considered as RESERVED and may NOT be used as a general purpose register. Bit 7:3 = RG[4:0]: Register Group number. These bits contain the number (in the range 0 to 31) of the 8-register block specified in the srp1 instruction, to which r8 to r15 are to be mapped. Bit 2 = RPS: Register Pointer Selector. This bit is set by the srp0 and srp1 instructions to indicate that the twin register pointing mode is selected. The bit is reset by the srp instruction to indicate that the single register pointing mode is selected. 0: Single register pointing mode 1: Twin register pointing mode Bit 1:0: Reserved. Forced by hardware to zero.
24/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont'd) Figure 9. Pointing to a single group of 16 registers
REGISTER GROUP REGIST ER FILE
Figure 10. Pointing to two groups of 8 registers
REGIST ER GROUP REGISTER FILE 31
BLOCK NUMBER
BLOCK NUMBER
31 F 30 29 E 28 points to: 27 D 26 25 25 addressed by BLOCK 7 9 9 4 8 7 7 3 6 5 5 2 4 r15 3 1 2 r0 1 0 0 addressed by BLOCK 2 1 GROUP 1 2 3 4 6 8 26 27 REGISTER POINTER 0 set by: 30 29
F
REGISTER POINTE R 0 & REGIST ER POINTE R 1 set by:
srp #2
instruction
E 28
srp0 #2
& D
srp1 #7
instructions point to:
4 r15 GROUP 3 3 r8
2
1
r7 r0 GROUP 1 addressed by BLOCK 2
0 0
25/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont'd) 2.3.4 Paged Registers Up to 64 pages, each containing 16 registers, may be mapped to Group F. These paged registers hold data and control information relating to the on-chip peripherals, each peripheral always being associated with the same pages and registers to ensure code compatibility between ST9+ devices. The number of these registers depends on the peripherals present in the specific ST9 device. In other words, pages only exist if the relevant peripheral is present. The paged registers are addressed using the normal register addressing modes, in conjunction with the Page Pointer register, R234, which is one of the System registers. This register selects the page to be mapped to Group F and, once set, does not need to be changed if two or more registers on the same page are to be addressed in succession. Thus the instructions: spp #5 ld R242, r4 will load the contents of working register r4 into the third register of page 5 (R242). Warning: During an interrupt, the PPR register is not saved automatically in the stack. If needed, it should be saved/restored by the user within the interrupt routine. PAGE POINTER REGISTER (PPR) R234 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset value: xxxx xx00 (xxh)
7 PP5 PP4 PP3 PP2 PP1 PP0 0 0 0
- Selection of internal or external System and User Stack areas, - Management of the clock frequency, - Enabling of Bus request and Wait signals when interfacing to external memory. MODE REGISTER (MODER) R235 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset value: 1110 0000 (E0h)
7
SSP USP DIV2 PRS2 PRS1
0
PRS0 BRQEN HIMP
Bit 7 = SSP: System Stack Pointer. This bit selects an internal or external System Stack area. 0: External system stack area, in memory space. 1: Internal system stack area, in the Register File (reset state). Bit 6 = USP: User Stack Pointer. This bit selects an internal or external User Stack area. 0: External user stack area, in memory space. 1: Internal user stack area, in the Register File (reset state). Bit 5 = DIV2: OSCIN Clock Divided by 2. This bit controls the divide-by-2 circuit operating on OSCIN. 0: Clock divided by 1 1: Clock divided by 2 Bit 4:2 = PRS[2:0]: CPUCLK Prescaler. These bits load the prescaler division factor for the internal clock (INTCLK). The prescaler factor selects the internal clock frequency, which can be divided by a factor from 1 to 8. Refer to the Reset and Clock Control chapter for further information. Bit 1 = BRQEN: Bus Request Enable. 0: External Memory Bus Request disabled 1: External Memory Bus Request enabled on the BREQ pin (where available). Bit 0 = HIMP: High Impedance Enable. When any of Ports 0, 1, 2 or 6 depending on device configuration, are programmed as Address and Data lines to interface external Memory, these lines and the Memory interface control lines (AS,
Bit 7:2 = PP[5:0]: Page Pointer. These bits contain the number (in the range 0 to 63) of the page specified in the spp instruction. Once the page pointer has been set, there is no need to refresh it unless a different page is required. Bit 1:0: Reserved. Forced by hardware to 0. 2.3.5 Mode Register The Mode Register allows control of the following operating parameters:
26/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont'd) DS, R/W) can be forced into the High Impedance state by setting the HIMP bit. When this bit is reset, it has no effect. Setting the HIMP bit is recommended for noise reduction when only internal Memory is used. If Port 1 and/or 2 are declared as an address AND as an I/O port (for example: P10... P14 = Address, and P15... P17 = I/O), the HIMP bit has no effect on the I/O lines. 2.3.6 Stack Pointers Two separate, double-register stack pointers are available: the System Stack Pointer and the User Stack Pointer, both of which can address registers or memory. The stack pointers point to the "bottom" of the stacks which are filled using the push commands and emptied using the pop commands. The stack pointer is automatically pre-decremented when data is "pushed" in and post-incremented when data is "popped" out. The push and pop commands used to manage the System Stack may be addressed to the User Stack by adding the suffix "u". To use a stack instruction for a word, the suffix "w" is added. These suffixes may be combined. When bytes (or words) are "popped" out from a stack, the contents of the stack locations are unchanged until fresh data is loaded. Thus, when data is "popped" from a stack area, the stack contents remain unchanged. Note: Instructions such as: pushuw RR236 or pushw RR238, as well as the corresponding pop instructions (where R236 & R237, and R238 & R239 are themselves the user and system stack pointers respectively), must not be used, since the pointer values are themselves automatically changed by the push or pop instruction, thus corrupting their value. System Stack The System Stack is used for the temporary storage of system and/or control data, such as the Flag register and the Program counter. The following automatically push data onto the System Stack: - Interrupts When entering an interrupt, the PC and the Flag Register are pushed onto the System Stack. If the ENCSR bit in the EMR2 register is set, then the
Code Segment Register is also pushed onto the System Stack. - Subroutine Calls When a call instruction is executed, only the PC is pushed onto stack, whereas when a calls instruction (call segment) is executed, both the PC and the Code Segment Register are pushed onto the System Stack. - Link Instruction The link or linku instructions create a C language stack frame of user-defined length in the System or User Stack. All of the above conditions are associated with their counterparts, such as return instructions, which pop the stored data items off the stack. User Stack The User Stack provides a totally user-controlled stacking area. The User Stack Pointer consists of two registers, R236 and R237, which are both used for addressing a stack in memory. When stacking in the Register File, the User Stack Pointer High Register, R236, becomes redundant but must be considered as reserved. Stack Pointers Both System and User stacks are pointed to by double-byte stack pointers. Stacks may be set up in RAM or in the Register File. Only the lower byte will be required if the stack is in the Register File. The upper byte must then be considered as reserved and must not be used as a general purpose register. The stack pointer registers are located in the System Group of the Register File, this is illustrated in Table 4. Stack location Care is necessary when managing stacks as there is no limit to stack sizes apart from the bottom of any address space in which the stack is placed. Consequently programmers are advised to use a stack pointer value as high as possible, particularly when using the Register File as a stacking area. Group D is a good location for a stack in the Register File, since it is the highest available area. The stacks may be located anywhere in the first 14 groups of the Register File (internal stacks) or in RAM (external stacks). Note. Stacks must not be located in the Paged Register Group or in the System Register Group.
27/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont'd) USER STACK POINTER HIGH REGISTER (USPHR) R236 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset value: undefined
7 0 USP1 USP1 USP1 USP1 USP1 USP1 USP9 USP8 5 4 3 2 1 0
SYSTEM STACK POINTER HIGH REGISTER (SSPHR) R238 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset value: undefined
7 0 SSP1 SSP1 SSP1 SSP1 SSP1 SSP1 SSP9 SSP8 5 4 3 2 1 0
USER STACK POINTER LOW REGISTER (USPLR) R237 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset value: undefined
7 0
SYSTEM STACK POINTER LOW REGISTER (SSPLR) R239 - Read/Write Register Group: E (System) Reset value: undefined
7 0
USP7 USP6 USP5 USP4 USP3 USP2 USP1 USP0
SSP7 SSP6 SSP5 SSP4 SSP3 SSP2 SSP1 SSP0
Figure 11. Internal Stack Mode
Figure 12. External Stack Mode
REGIST ER FILE STACK POINTER (LOW) F points to: F
REGISTER FILE
STACK POINTER (LOW) & STACK POINTER (HIGH) point to: MEMORY
E STACK D
E
D
STACK 4 4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
28/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.4 MEMORY ORGANIZATION Code and data are accessed within the same linear address space. All of the physically separate memory areas, including the internal ROM, internal RAM and external memory are mapped in a common address space. The ST9+ provides a total addressable memory space of 4 Mbytes. This address space is arranged as 64 segments of 64 Kbytes; each segment is again subdivided into four 16 Kbyte pages. The mapping of the various memory areas (internal RAM or ROM, external memory) differs from device to device. Each 64-Kbyte physical memory segment is mapped either internally or externally; if the memory is internal and smaller than 64 Kbytes, the remaining locations in the 64-Kbyte segment are not used (reserved). Refer to the Register and Memory Map Chapter for more details on the memory map.
29/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.5 MEMORY MANAGEMENT UNIT The CPU Core includes a Memory Management Unit (MMU) which must be programmed to perform memory accesses (even if external memory is not used). The MMU is controlled by 7 registers and 2 bits (ENCSR and DPRREM) present in EMR2, which may be written and read by the user program. These registers are mapped within group F, Page 21 of the Register File. The 7 registers may be Figure 13. Page 21 Registers
Page 21 FFh FEh FDh FCh FBh FAh F9h F8h F7h F6h F5h F4h F3h F2h F1h F0h EMR2 EMR1 CSR DPR3 DPR2 DPR1 DPR0 DMASR ISR R255 R254 R253 R252 R251 R250 R249 R248 R247 R246 R245 R244 R243 R242 R241 R240 MMU EM MMU MMU SSPLR SSPHR USPLR USPHR MODER PPR RP1 RP0 FLAGR CICR P5DR P4DR P3DR P2DR P1DR P0DR SSPLR SSPHR USPLR USPHR MODER PPR RP1 RP0 FLAGR CICR P5DR P4DR DPR3 DPR2 DPR1 DPR0
sub-divided into 2 main groups: a first group of four 8-bit registers (DPR[3:0]), and a second group of three 6-bit registers (CSR, ISR, and DMASR). The first group is used to extend the address during Data Memory access (DPR[3:0]). The second is used to manage Program and Data Memory accesses during Code execution (CSR), Interrupts Service Routines (ISR or CSR), and DMA transfers (DMASR or ISR).
Relocation of P[3:0] and DPR[3:0] Registers
DMASR ISR EMR2 EMR1 CSR DPR3 DPR2 1 DPR0
DMASR ISR EMR2 EMR1 CSR P3DR P2DR P1DR P0DR
Bit DPRREM=0 (default setting)
Bit DPRREM=1
30/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.6 ADDRESS SPACE EXTENSION To manage 4 Mbytes of addressing space it is necessary to have 22 address bits. The MMU adds 6 bits to the usual 16-bit address, thus translating a 16-bit virtual address into a 22-bit physical address. There are 2 different ways to do this depending on the memory involved and on the operation being performed. 2.6.1 Addressing 16-Kbyte Pages This extension mode is implicitly used to address Data memory space if no DMA is being performed. The Data memory space is divided into 4 pages of 16 Kbytes. Each one of the four 8-bit registers (DPR[3:0], Data Page Registers) selects a different 16-Kbyte page. The DPR registers allow access to the entire memory space which contains 256 pages of 16 Kbytes. Data paging is performed by extending the 14 LSB of the 16-bit address with the contents of a DPR register. The two MSBs of the 16-bit address are interpreted as the identification number of the DPR register to be used. Therefore, the DPR registers Figure 14. Addressing via DPR[3:0] are involved in the following virtual address ranges: DPR0: from 0000h to 3FFFh; DPR1: from 4000h to 7FFFh; DPR2: from 8000h to BFFFh; DPR3: from C000h to FFFFh. The contents of the selected DPR register specify one of the 256 possible data memory pages. This 8-bit data page number, in addition to the remaining 14-bit page offset address forms the physical 22-bit address (see Figure 14). A DPR register cannot be modified via an addressing mode that uses the same DPR register. For instance, the instruction "POPW DPR0" is legal only if the stack is kept either in the register file or in a memory location above 8000h, where DPR2 and DPR3 are used. Otherwise, since DPR0 and DPR1 are modified by the instruction, unpredictable behaviour could result.
MMU registers DPR0 DPR1 DPR2 DPR3
16-bit virtual address
00
01
10
11
2M
SB
8 bits
14 LSB
22-bit physical address
31/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
ADDRESS SPACE EXTENSION (Cont'd) 2.6.2 Addressing 64-Kbyte Segments This extension mode is used to address Data memory space during a DMA and Program memory space during any code execution (normal code and interrupt routines). Three registers are used: CSR, ISR, and DMASR. The 6-bit contents of one of the registers CSR, ISR, or DMASR define one out of 64 Memory segments of 64 Kbytes within the 4 Mbytes address space. The register contents represent the 6 MSBs of the memory address, whereas the 16 LSBs of the address (intra-segment address) are given by the virtual 16-bit address (see Figure 15). 2.7 MMU REGISTERS The MMU uses 7 registers mapped into Group F, Page 21 of the Register File and 2 bits of the EMR2 register.
Most of these registers do not have a default value after reset. 2.7.1 DPR[3:0]: Data Page Registers The DPR[3:0] registers allow access to the entire 4 Mbyte memory space composed of 256 pages of 16 Kbytes. 2.7.1.1 Data Page Register Relocation If these registers are to be used frequently, they may be relocated in register group E, by programming bit 5 of the EMR2-R246 register in page 21. If this bit is set, the DPR[3:0] registers are located at R224-227 in place of the Port 0-3 Data Registers, which are re-mapped to the default DPR's locations: R240-243 page 21. Data Page Register relocation is illustrated in Figure 13.
Figure 15. Addressing via CSR, ISR, and DMASR
MMU registers CSR DMASR ISR
16-bit virtual address
1 1 2 Fetching program instruction Data Memory accessed in DMA Fetching interrupt instruction or DMA access to Program Memory
2
3
6 bits
3
22-bit physical address
32/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MMU REGISTERS (Cont'd) DATA PAGE REGISTER 0 (DPR0) R240 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: undefined This register is relocated to R224 if EMR2.5 is set.
7 DPR0 _7 DPR0 _6 DPR0 _5 DPR0 _4 DPR0 _3 DPR0 DPR0 _2 _1 0 DPR0 _0
DATA PAGE REGISTER 2 (DPR2) R242 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: undefined This register is relocated to R226 if EMR2.5 is set.
7 DPR2 _7 DPR2 _6 DPR2 _5 DPR2 _4 DPR2 _3 DPR2 _2 DPR2 _1 0 DPR2 _0
Bit 7:0 = DPR0_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data Memory page number. They are used as the most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend the address during a Data Memory access. The DPR0 register is used when addressing the virtual address range 0000h-3FFFh. DATA PAGE REGISTER 1 (DPR1) R241 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: undefined This register is relocated to R225 if EMR2.5 is set.
7 DPR1 _7 DPR1 _6 DPR1 _5 DPR1 _4 DPR1 _3 DPR1 DPR1 _2 _1 0 DPR1 _0
Bit 7:0 = DPR2_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data memory page. They are used as the most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend the address during a Data memory access. The DPR2 register is involved when the virtual address is in the range 8000h-BFFFh. DATA PAGE REGISTER 3 (DPR3) R243 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: undefined This register is relocated to R227 if EMR2.5 is set.
7 DPR3 _7 DPR3 _6 DPR3 _5 DPR3 _4 DPR3 _3 DPR3 _2 DPR3 _1 0 DPR3 _0
Bit 7:0 = DPR1_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data Memory page number. They are used as the most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend the address during a Data Memory access. The DPR1 register is used when addressing the virtual address range 4000h-7FFFh.
Bit 7:0 = DPR3_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data memory page. They are used as the most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend the address during a Data memory access. The DPR3 register is involved when the virtual address is in the range C000h-FFFFh.
33/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MMU REGISTERS (Cont'd) 2.7.2 CSR: Code Segment Register This register selects the 64-Kbyte code segment being used at run-time to access instructions. It can also be used to access data if the spm instruction has been executed (or ldpp, ldpd, lddp). Only the 6 LSBs of the CSR register are implemented, and bits 6 and 7 are reserved. The CSR register allows access to the entire memory space, divided into 64 segments of 64 Kbytes. To generate the 22-bit Program memory address, the contents of the CSR register is directly used as the 6 MSBs, and the 16-bit virtual address as the 16 LSBs. Note: The CSR register should only be read and not written for data operations (there are some exceptions which are documented in the following paragraph). It is, however, modified either directly by means of the jps and calls instructions, or indirectly via the stack, by means of the rets instruction. CODE SEGMENT REGISTER (CSR) R244 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 CSR_ 5 CSR_ 4 CSR_ 3 CSR_ CSR_ 2 1 0 CSR_ 0
ISR and ENCSR bit (EMR2 register) are also described in the chapter relating to Interrupts, please refer to this description for further details. Bit 7:6 = Reserved, keep in reset state. Bit 5:0 = ISR_[5:0]: These bits define the 64-Kbyte memory segment (among 64) which contains the interrupt vector table and the code for interrupt service routines and DMA transfers (when the PS bit of the DAPR register is reset). These bits are used as the most significant address bits (A21-16). The ISR is used to extend the address space in two cases: - Whenever an interrupt occurs: ISR points to the 64-Kbyte memory segment containing the interrupt vector table and the interrupt service routine code. See also the Interrupts chapter. - During DMA transactions between the peripheral and memory when the PS bit of the DAPR register is reset : ISR points to the 64 K-byte Memory segment that will be involved in the DMA transaction. 2.7.4 DMASR: DMA Segment Register DMA SEGMENT REGISTER (DMASR) R249 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: undefined
7 0 DMA SR_5 DMA SR_4 DMA SR_3 DMA SR_2 DMA SR_1 DMA SR_0
0
0
Bit 7:6 = Reserved, keep in reset state. Bit 5:0 = CSR_[5:0]: These bits define the 64Kbyte memory segment (among 64) which contains the code being executed. These bits are used as the most significant address bits (A21-16). 2.7.3 ISR: Interrupt Segment Register INTERRUPT SEGMENT REGISTER (ISR) R248 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: undefined
7 0 0 0 ISR_5 ISR_4 ISR_3 ISR_2 ISR_1 ISR_0
0
0
Bit 7:6 = Reserved, keep in reset state. Bit 5:0 = DMASR_[5:0]: These bits define the 64Kbyte Memory segment (among 64) used when a DMA transaction is performed between the peripheral's data register and Memory, with the PS bit of the DAPR register set. These bits are used as the most significant address bits (A21-16). If the PS bit is reset, the ISR register is used to extend the address.
34/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MMU REGISTERS (Cont'd) Figure 16. Memory Addressing Scheme (example)
4M bytes
3FFFFFh
16K
294000h
DPR3 DPR2 DPR1 DPR0 16K 16K 20C000h 200000h 1FFFFFh 240000h 23FFFFh
64K DMASR
040000h 03FFFFh 030000h 020000h
ISR CSR
64K 16K 64K
010000h 00C000h 000000h
35/190
9
ST90158 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.8 MMU USAGE 2.8.1 Normal Program Execution Program memory is organized as a set of 64Kbyte segments. The program can span as many segments as needed, but a procedure cannot stretch across segment boundaries. jps, calls and rets instructions, which automatically modify the CSR, must be used to jump across segment boundaries. Writing to the CSR is forbidden during normal program execution because it is not synchronized with the opcode fetch. This could result in fetching the first byte of an instruction from one memory segment and the second byte from another. Writing to the CSR is allowed when it is not being used, i.e during an interrupt service routine if ENCSR is reset. Note that a routine must always be called in the same way, i.e. either always with call or always with calls, depending on whether the routine ends with ret or rets. This means that if the routine is written without prior knowledge of the location of other routines which call it, and all the program code does not fit into a single 64-Kbyte segment, then calls/rets should be used. In typical microcontroller applications, less than 64 Kbytes of RAM are used, so the four Data space pages are normally sufficient, and no change of DPR[3:0] is needed during Program execution. It may be useful however to map part of the ROM into the data space if it contains strings, tables, bit maps, etc. If there is to be frequent use of paging, the user can set bit 5 (DPRREM) in register R246 (EMR2) of Page 21. This swaps the location of registers DPR[3:0] with that of the data registers of Ports 03. In this way, DPR registers can be accessed without the need to save/set/restore the Page Pointer Register. Port registers are therefore moved to page 21. Applications that require a lot of paging typically use more than 64 Kbytes of external memory, and as ports 0, 1 and 2 are required to address it, their data registers are unused. 2.8.2 Interrupts The ISR register has been created so that the interrupt routines may be found by means of the same vector table even after a segment jump/call. When an interrupt occurs, the CPU behaves in one of 2 ways, depending on the value of the ENCSR bit in the EMR2 register (R246 on Page 21). If this bit is reset (default condition), the CPU works in original ST9 compatibility mode. For the duration of the interrupt service routine, the ISR is used instead of the CSR, and the interrupt stack frame is kept exactly as in the original ST9 (only the PC and flags are pushed). This avoids the need to save the CSR on the stack in the case of an interrupt, ensuring a fast interrupt response time. The drawback is that it is not possible for an interrupt service routine to perform segment calls/jps: these instructions would update the CSR, which, in this case, is not used (ISR is used instead). The code size of all interrupt service routines is thus limited to 64 Kbytes. If, instead, bit 6 of the EMR2 register is set, the ISR is used only to point to the interrupt vector table and to initialize the CSR at the beginning of the interrupt service routine: the old CSR is pushed onto the stack together with the PC and the flags, and then the CSR is loaded with the ISR. In this case, an iret will also restore the CSR from the stack. This approach lets interrupt service routines access the whole 4-Mbyte address space. The drawback is that the interrupt response time is slightly increased, because of the need to also save the CSR on the stack. Compatibility with the original ST9 is also lost in this case, because the interrupt stack frame is different; this difference, however, would not be noticeable for a vast majority of programs. Data memory mapping is independent of the value of bit 6 of the EMR2 register, and remains the same as for normal code execution: the stack is the same as that used by the main program, as in the ST9. If the interrupt service routine needs to access additional Data memory, it must save one (or more) of the DPRs, load it with the needed memory page and restore it before completion. 2.8.3 DMA Depending on the PS bit in the DAPR register (see DMA chapter) DMA uses either the ISR or the DMASR for memory accesses: this guarantees that a DMA will always find its memory segment(s), no matter what segment changes the application has performed. Unlike interrupts, DMA transactions cannot save/restore paging registers, so a dedicated segment register (DMASR) has been created. Having only one register of this kind means that all DMA accesses should be programmed in one of the two following segments: the one pointed to by the ISR (when the PS bit of the DAPR register is reset), and the one referenced by the DMASR (when the PS bit is set).
36/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
3 REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
3.1 MEMORY CONFIGURATION The Program memory space of the ST90135/158, 0/16/24/32/48/64/K bytes of directly addressable on-chip memory, is fully available to the user. The first 256 memory locations from address 0 to FFh hold the Reset Vector, the Top-Level (Pseudo Non-Maskable) interrupt, the Divide by Zero Trap Routine vector and, optionally, the interrupt vector table for use with the on-chip peripherals and the external interrupt sources. Apart from this case no other part of the Program memory has a predetermined function except segment 21h which is reserved for use by STMicroelectronics. 3.2 EPROM PROGRAMMING The 65536 bytes of EPROM memory of the ST90E158 may be programmed by using the EPROM Programming Boards (EPB) or gang programmers available from STMicroelectronics. EPROM Erasing The EPROM of the windowed package of the ST90E158 may be erased by exposure to Ultra-Violet light. The erasure characteristic of the ST90E158 is such that erasure begins when the memory is exposed to light with a wave lengths shorter than approximately 4000A. It should be noted that sunlight and some types of fluorescent lamps have wavelengths in the range 3000-4000A. It is thus recommended that the window of the ST90E158 packages be covered by an opaque label to prevent unintentional erasure problems when testing the application in such an environment. The recommended erasure procedure of the EPROM is the exposure to short wave ultraviolet light which have a wave-length 2537A. The integrated dose (i.e. U.V. intensity x exposure time) for erasure should be a minimum of 15W-sec/cm2. The erasure time with this dosage is approximately 30 minutes using an ultraviolet lamp with 12000mW/cm2 power rating. The ST90E158 should be placed within 2.5cm (1 inch) of the lamp tubes during erasure. Table 5. First 6 Bytes of Program Space
0 1 2 3 4 5 Address high of Power on Reset routine Address low of Power on Reset routine Address Address Address Address high of Divide by zero trap Subroutine low of Divide by zero trap Subroutine high of Top Level Interrupt routine low of Top Level Interrupt routine
37/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Figure 17. Interrupt Vector Table
REGISTE R FILE F PAGE REGISTE RS PROGRAM MEMORY USER ISR USER DIVIDE-BY -ZERO ISR USER MAIN PROGRAM INT. VECTOR REGISTER USER TOP LEVEL ISR R240 R239
0000FFh ODD EVEN LO HI LO 000004h HI LO 000002h HI LO 000000h HI ISR ADDRES S VECTOR TOP LEVEL INT. DIVIDE-B Y-ZERO POWER-ON RESET TABLE
38/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
3.3 MEMORY MAP Figure 18. Memory Map
3FFFFFh
External Memory
Upper Memory (usually RAM mapped in Segment 23h)
230000h 22FFFFh
Reserved
SEGMENTS 21h and 22h 128 Kbytes
Internal RAM 512 bytes 768 bytes 1 Kbytes 1.5 Kbytes 2 Kbytes
20FFFFh
210000h 20FFFFh
PAGE 83 - 16 Kbytes
20C000h 20BFFFh
PAGE 82 - 16 Kbytes
20FE00h 20FD00h 20FC00h 204000h 203FFFh 208000h 207FFFh
SEGMENT 20h 64 Kbytes
PAGE 81 - 16 Kbytes PAGE 80 - 16 Kbytes
200000h 1FFFFFh
20FA00h 20F800h
External Memory
Lower Memory (usually ROM/EPROM mapped in Segment 1)
010000h 00FFFFh
64 Kbytes 48 Kbytes 32 Kbytes
00FFFFh 00BFFFh 007FFFh 00FFFFh 003FFFh
PAGE 3 - 16 Kbytes
00C000h 00BFFFh
24 Kbytes Internal ROM 16 Kbytes
Internal ROM/EPROM (external ROM on ROMless devices)
PAGE 2 - 16 Kbytes
008000h 007FFFh
SEGMENT 0 64 Kbytes
PAGE 1 - 16 Kbytes
004000h 003FFFh
000000 h
PAGE 0 - 16 Kbytes
000000h
Note: The total amount of directly addressable external memory is 64 Kbytes.
39/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
3.4 ST90158/135 REGISTER MAP The following pages contain a list of ST90158/135 registers, grouped by peripheral or function. Be very careful to correctly program both: - The set of registers dedicated to a particular function or peripheral. - Registers common to other functions. - In particular, double-check that any registers with "undefined" reset values have been correctly initialised. Warning: Note that in the EIVR and each IVR register, all bits are significant. Take care when defining base vector addresses that entries in the Interrupt Vector table do not overlap.
Table 6. Common Registers
Function or Peripheral SCI, MFT ADC SPI, WDT, STIM I/O PORTS EXTERNAL INTERRUPT RCCU Common Registers CICR + NICR + DMA REGISTERS + I/O PORT REGISTERS CICR + NICR + I/O PORT REGISTERS CICR + NICR + EXTERNAL INTERRUPT REGISTERS + I/O PORT REGISTERS I/O PORT REGISTERS + MODER INTERRUPT REGISTERS + I/O PORT REGISTERS INTERRUPT REGISTERS + MODER
40/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Table 7. Group F Pages Resources available on the ST90158/ST90135 devices:
Register 0 R255 R254 SPI R253 R252 R251 R250 WDT R249 R248 MFT1 R247 R246 R245 R244 R243 R242 R241 Res. R240 (*) ST90158/ST90E158 only. Not present on ST90135. PORT PORT 0 4 PORT PORT 1 5 MFT1 MFT3 Res. Res. PORT 2 WCR Res. Res. 2 3 8 9 10 11 Page 12 13 21 24 25 43 55 63
PORT 7 Res. Res. Res.
PORT 9
Res.
PORT 6
Res. MMU MFT MFT0 (*) MFT3 Res. EXT MI SCI0 SCI1 (*)
PORT 8
A/D
RCCU
EXT INT
Res. Res. Res. Res. MMU STIM Res. Res. RCCU RCCU
MFT0 (*)
41/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Table 8. Detailed Register Map
Page (Decimal) Block Reg. No. R230 R231 R232 R233 Core R234 R235 R236 N/A R237 R238 R239 R224 I/O Port 5:4,2:0 R225 R226 R228 R229 R242 R243 INT R244 R245 R246 R247 0 WDT R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 SPI I/O Port 0 I/O 2 Port 1 I/O Port 2 R253 R254 R240 R241 R242 R244 R245 R246 R248 R249 R250 Register Name CICR FLAGR RP0 RP1 PPR MODER USPHR USPLR SSPHR SSPLR P0DR P1DR P2DR P4DR P5DR EITR EIPR EIMR EIPLR EIVR NICR WDTHR WDTLR WDTPR WDTCR WCR SPIDR SPICR P0C0 P0C1 P0C2 P1C0 P1C1 P1C2 P2C0 P2C1 P2C2 Description Central Interrupt Control Register Flag Register Pointer 0 Register Pointer 1 Register Page Pointer Register Mode Register User Stack Pointer High Register User Stack Pointer Low Register System Stack Pointer High Reg. System Stack Pointer Low Reg. Port 0 Data Register Port 1 Data Register Port 2 Data Register Port 4 Data Register Port 5 Data Register External Interrupt Trigger Register External Interrupt Pending Reg. External Interrupt Mask-bit Reg. External Interrupt Priority Level Reg. External Interrupt Vector Register Nested Interrupt Control Watchdog Timer High Register Watchdog Timer Low Register Watchdog Timer Prescaler Reg. Watchdog Timer Control Register Wait Control Register SPI Data Register SPI Control Register Port 0 Configuration Register 0 Port 0 Configuration Register 1 Port 0 Configuration Register 2 Port 1 Configuration Register 0 Port 1 Configuration Register 1 Port 1 Configuration Register 2 Port 2 Configuration Register 0 Port 2 Configuration Register 1 Port 2 Configuration Register 2 Reset Value Hex. 87 00 xx xx xx E0 xx xx xx xx FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF x6 00 FF FF FF 12 7F xx 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 00 00
42/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page (Decimal)
Block I/O Port 4 I/O Port 5
Reg. No. R240 R241 R242 R244 R245 R246 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255
Register Name P4C0 P4C1 P4C2 P5C0 P5C1 P5C2 P6C0 P6C1 P6C2 P6DR P7C0 P7C1 P7C2 P7DR
Description Port 4 Configuration Register 0 Port 4 Configuration Register 1 Port 4 Configuration Register 2 Port 5 Configuration Register 0 Port 5 Configuration Register 1 Port 5 Configuration Register 2 Port 6 Configuration Register 0 Port 6 Configuration Register 1 Port 6 Configuration Register 2 Port 6 Data Register Port 7 Configuration Register 0 Port 7 Configuration Register 1 Port 7 Configuration Register 2 Port 7 Data Register
Reset Value Hex. FF 00 00 FF 00 00 FF 00 00 FF 00/FF 00/00 00/00 FF
3
I/O Port 6 I/O Port 7
43/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page (Decimal)
Block
Reg. No. R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R247 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255 R244 R245 R246 R247
Register Name REG0HR1 REG0LR1 REG1HR1 REG1LR1 CMP0HR1 CMP0LR1 CMP1HR1 CMP1LR1 TCR1 TMR1 ICR1 PRSR1 OACR1 OBCR1 FLAGR1 IDMR1 DCPR0 DAPR0 IVR0 IDCR0 IOCR DCPR1 DAPR1 IVR1 IDCR1 REG0HR0 REG0LR0 REG1HR0 REG1LR0 CMP0HR0 CMP0LR0 CMP1HR0 CMP1LR0 TCR0 TMR0 ICR0 PRSR0 OACR0 OBCR0 FLAGR0 IDMR0
Description Capture Load Register 0 High Capture Load Register 0 Low Capture Load Register 1 High Capture Load Register 1 Low Compare 0 Register High Compare 0 Register Low Compare 1 Register High Compare 1 Register Low Timer Control Register Timer Mode Register External Input Control Register Prescaler Register Output A Control Register Output B Control Register Flags Register Interrupt/DMA Mask Register DMA Counter Pointer Register DMA Address Pointer Register Interrupt Vector Register Interrupt/DMA Control Register I/O Connection Register DMA Counter Pointer Register DMA Address Pointer Register Interrupt Vector Register Interrupt/DMA Control Register Capture Load Register 0 High Capture Load Register 0 Low Capture Load Register 1 High Capture Load Register 1 Low Compare 0 Register High Compare 0 Register Low Compare 1 Register High Compare 1 Register Low Timer Control Register Timer Mode Register External Input Control Register Prescaler Register Output A Control Register Output B Control Register Flags Register Interrupt/DMA Mask Register
Reset Value Hex. xx xx xx xx 00 00 00 00 0x 00 0x 00 xx xx 00 00 xx xx xx C7 FC xx xx xx C7 xx xx xx xx 00 00 00 00 0x 00 0x 00 xx xx 00 00
8 MFT1
9
MFT0,1
R248 R240 R241 R242 R243 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244
MFT0 (*) 10
R245 R246 R247 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255
44/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page (Decimal)
Block
Reg. No. R240
Register Name STH STL STP STC REG0HR1 REG0LR1 REG1HR1 REG1LR1 CMP0HR1 CMP0LR1 CMP1HR1 CMP1LR1 TCR1 TMR1 ICR1 PRSR1 OACR1 OBCR1 FLAGR1 IDMR1 DCPR0 DAPR0 IVR0 IDCR0 DPR0 DPR1 DPR2 DPR3 CSR ISR DMASR EMR1 EMR2
Description Counter High Byte Register Counter Low Byte Register Standard Timer Prescaler Register Standard Timer Control Register Capture Load Register 0 High Capture Load Register 0 Low Capture Load Register 1 High Capture Load Register 1 Low Compare 0 Register High Compare 0 Register Low Compare 1 Register High Compare 1 Register Low Timer Control Register Timer Mode Register External Input Control Register Prescaler Register Output A Control Register Output B Control Register Flags Register Interrupt/DMA Mask Register DMA Counter Pointer Register DMA Address Pointer Register Interrupt Vector Register Interrupt/DMA Control Register Data Page Register 0 Data Page Register 1 Data Page Register 2 Data Page Register 3 Code Segment Register Interrupt Segment Register DMA Segment Register External Memory Register 1 External Memory Register 2
Reset Value Hex. FF FF FF 14 xx xx xx xx 00 00 00 00 0x 00 0x 00 xx xx 00 00 xx xx xx C7 xx xx xx xx 00 xx xx 80 0F
11
STIM
R241 R242 R243 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R247 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255 R244 R245 R246 R247 R240 R241 R242
12 MFT3
13
MMU 21
R243 R244 R248 R249 R245 R246
EXTMI
45/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page (Decimal)
Block
Reg. No. R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R247
Register Name RDCPR0 RDAPR0 TDCPR0 TDAPR0 IVR0 ACR0 IMR0 ISR0 RXBR0 TXBR0 IDPR0 CHCR0 CCR0 BRGHR0 BRGLR0 SICR0 SOCR0 RDCPR1 RDAPR1 TDCPR1 TDAPR1 IVR1 ACR1 IMR1 ISR1 RXBR1 TXBR1 IDPR1 CHCR1 CCR1 BRGHR1 BRGLR1 SICR1 SOCR1 P8C0 P8C1 P8C2 P8DR P9C0 P9C1 P9C2 P9DR
Description Receiver DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Receiver DMA Source Address Pointer Transmitter DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Transmitter DMA Destination Address Pointer Interrupt Vector Register Address/Data Compare Register Interrupt Mask Register Interrupt Status Register Receive Buffer Register Transmitter Buffer Register Interrupt/DMA Priority Register Character Configuration Register Clock Configuration Register Baud Rate Generator High Reg. Baud Rate Generator Low Register Synchronous Input Control Synchronous Output Control Receiver DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Receiver DMA Source Address Pointer Transmitter DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Transmitter DMA Destination Address Pointer Interrupt Vector Register Address/Data Compare Register Interrupt Mask Register Interrupt Status Register Receive Buffer Register Transmitter Buffer Register Interrupt/DMA Priority Register Character Configuration Register Clock Configuration Register Baud Rate Generator High Reg. Baud Rate Generator Low Register Synchronous Input Control Synchronous Output Control Port 8 Configuration Register 0 Port 8 Configuration Register 1 Port 8 Configuration Register 2 Port 8 Data Register Port 9 Configuration Register 0 Port 9 Configuration Register 1 Port 9 Configuration Register 2 Port 9 Data Register
Reset Value Hex. xx xx xx xx xx xx x0 xx xx xx xx xx 00 xx xx 03 01 xx xx xx xx xx xx x0 xx xx xx xx xx 00 xx xx 03 01 00/03 00/00 00/00 FF 00/00 00/00 00/00 FF
24
SCI0
R248 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R247 R248 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255
25
SCI1 (*)
I/O Port 8 43 I/O Port 9
46/190
9
ST90158 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page (Decimal)
Block
Reg. No. R240
Register Name CLKCTL CLK_FLAG PLLCONF D0R0 D1R0 D2R0 D3R0 D4R0 D5R0 D6R0 D7R0 LT6R0 LT7R0 UT6R0 UT7R0 CRR0 CLR0 ICR0 IVR0
Description Clock Control Register Clock Flag Register PLL Configuration Register Channel 0 Data Register Channel 1 Data Register Channel 2 Data Register Channel 3 Data Register Channel 4 Data Register Channel 5 Data Register Channel 6 Data Register Channel 7 Data Register Channel 6 Lower Threshold Reg. Channel 7 Lower Threshold Reg. Channel 6 Upper Threshold Reg. Channel 7 Upper Threshold Reg. Compare Result Register Control Logic Register Interrupt Control Register Interrupt Vector Register
Reset Value Hex. 00 48, 28 or 08 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx 0F 00 0F x2
55
RCCU
R242 R246 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R247 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255
63
AD0
(*) Not present on ST90135. Note: xx denotes a byte with an undefined value, however some of the bits may have defined values. Refer to register description for details.
47/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
4 INTERRUPTS
4.1 INTRODUCTION The ST9 responds to peripheral and external events through its interrupt channels. Current program execution can be suspended to allow the ST9 to execute a specific response routine when such an event occurs, providing that interrupts have been enabled, and according to a priority mechanism. If an event generates a valid interrupt request, the current program status is saved and control passes to the appropriate Interrupt Service Routine. The ST9 CPU can receive requests from the following sources: - On-chip peripherals - External pins - Top-Level Pseudo-non-maskable interrupt According to the on-chip peripheral features, an event occurrence can generate an Interrupt request which depends on the selected mode. Up to eight external interrupt channels, with programmable input trigger edge, are available. In addition, a dedicated interrupt channel, set to the Top-level priority, can be devoted either to the external NMI pin (where available) to provide a NonMaskable Interrupt, or to the Timer/Watchdog. Interrupt service routines are addressed through a vector table mapped in Memory. Figure 19. Interrupt Response
n
4.2 INTERRUPT VECTORING The ST9 implements an interrupt vectoring structure which allows the on-chip peripheral to identify the location of the first instruction of the Interrupt Service Routine automatically. When an interrupt request is acknowledged, the peripheral interrupt module provides, through its Interrupt Vector Register (IVR), a vector to point into the vector table of locations containing the start addresses of the Interrupt Service Routines (defined by the programmer). Each peripheral has a specific IVR mapped within its Register File pages. The Interrupt Vector table, containing the addresses of the Interrupt Service Routines, is located in the first 256 locations of Memory pointed to by the ISR register, thus allowing 8-bit vector addressing. For a description of the ISR register refer to the chapter describing the MMU. The user Power on Reset vector is stored in the first two physical bytes in memory, 000000h and 000001h. The Top Level Interrupt vector is located at addresses 0004h and 0005h in the segment pointed to by the Interrupt Segment Register (ISR). With one Interrupt Vector register, it is possible to address several interrupt service routines; in fact, peripherals can share the same interrupt vector register among several interrupt channels. The most significant bits of the vector are user programmable to define the base vector address within the vector table, the least significant bits are controlled by the interrupt module, in hardware, to select the appropriate vector. Note: The first 256 locations of the memory segment pointed to by ISR can contain program code. 4.2.1 Divide by Zero trap The Divide by Zero trap vector is located at addresses 0002h and 0003h of each code segment; it should be noted that for each code segment a Divide by Zero service routine is required. Warning. Although the Divide by Zero Trap operates as an interrupt, the FLAG Register is not pushed onto the system Stack automatically. As a result it must be regarded as a subroutine, and the service routine must end with the RET instruction (not IRET ).
NORMAL PROGRAM FLOW
INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE
INTERRUPT
CLEAR PENDING BIT
IRET INSTRUCTION
VR001833
48/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
4.2.2 Segment Paging During Interrupt Routines The ENCSR bit in the EMR2 register can be used to select between original ST9 backward compatibility mode and ST9+ interrupt management mode. ST9 backward compatibility mode (ENCSR = 0) If ENCSR is reset, the CPU works in original ST9 compatibility mode. For the duration of the interrupt service routine, ISR is used instead of CSR, and the interrupt stack frame is identical to that of the original ST9: only the PC and Flags are pushed. This avoids saving the CSR on the stack in the event of an interrupt, thus ensuring a faster interrupt response time. It is not possible for an interrupt service routine to perform inter-segment calls or jumps: these instructions would update the CSR, which, in this case, is not used (ISR is used instead). The code segment size for all interrupt service routines is thus limited to 64K bytes. ST9+ mode (ENCSR = 1) If ENCSR is set, ISR is only used to point to the interrupt vector table and to initialize the CSR at the beginning of the interrupt service routine: the old CSR is pushed onto the stack together with the PC and flags, and CSR is then loaded with the contents of ISR. In this case, iret will also restore CSR from the stack. This approach allows interrupt service routines to access the entire 4 Mbytes of address space. The drawback is that the interrupt response time is slightly increased, because of the need to also save CSR on the stack. Full compatibility with the original ST9 is lost in this case, because the interrupt stack frame is different.
ENCSR Bit 0 1 Mode ST9 Compatible ST9+ Pushed/Popp ed PC, FLAGR, PC, FLAGR Registers CSR Max. Code Size 64KB No limit for interrupt service routine Within 1 segment Across segments
4.3 INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVELS The ST9 supports a fully programmable interrupt priority structure. Nine priority levels are available to define the channel priority relationships: - The on-chip peripheral channels and the eight external interrupt sources can be programmed within eight priority levels. Each channel has a 3bit field, PRL (Priority Level), that defines its priority level in the range from 0 (highest priority) to 7 (lowest priority). - The 9th level (Top Level Priority) is reserved for the Timer/Watchdog or the External Pseudo Non-Maskable Interrupt. An Interrupt service routine at this level cannot be interrupted in any arbitration mode. Its mask can be both maskable (TLI) or non-maskable (TLNM). 4.4 PRIORITY LEVEL ARBITRATION The 3 bits of CPL (Current Priority Level) in the Central Interrupt Control Register contain the priority of the currently running program (CPU priority). CPL is set to 7 (lowest priority) upon reset and can be modified during program execution either by software or automatically by hardware according to the selected Arbitration Mode. During every instruction, an arbitration phase takes place, during which, for every channel capable of generating an Interrupt, each priority level is compared to all the other requests (interrupts or DMA). If the highest priority request is an interrupt, its PRL value must be strictly lower (that is, higher priority) than the CPL value stored in the CICR register (R230) in order to be acknowledged. The Top Level Interrupt overrides every other priority. 4.4.1 Priority level 7 (Lowest) Interrupt requests at PRL level 7 cannot be acknowledged, as this PRL value (the lowest possible priority) cannot be strictly lower than the CPL value. This can be of use in a fully polled interrupt environment. 4.4.2 Maximum depth of nesting No more than 8 routines can be nested. If an interrupt routine at level N is being serviced, no other Interrupts located at level N can interrupt it. This guarantees a maximum number of 8 nested levels including the Top Level Interrupt request. 4.4.3 Simultaneous Interrupts If two or more requests occur at the same time and at the same priority level, an on-chip daisy chain, specific to every ST9 version, selects the channel
49/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
with the highest position in the chain, as shown in Figure 9 Table 9. Daisy Chain Priority
Highest Position INTA0 INTA1 INTB0 INTB1 INTC0 INTC1 INTD0 INTD1 TIMER0 SCI0 SCI1 A/D TIMER3 TIMER1 INT0/WDT INT1 INT2/SPI INT3 INT4/STIM INT5 INT6/RCCU INT7
Lowest Position
4.4.4 Dynamic Priority Level Modification The main program and routines can be specifically prioritized. Since the CPL is represented by 3 bits in a read/write register, it is possible to modify dynamically the current priority value during program execution. This means that a critical section can have a higher priority with respect to other interrupt requests. Furthermore it is possible to prioritize even the Main Program execution by modifying the CPL during its execution. See Figure 20 Figure 20. Example of Dynamic priority level modification in Nested Mode
INTERRUPT 6 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 6 Priority Level CPL is set to 7 4 by MAIN program ei INT6 MAIN CPL is set to 5 CPL6 > CPL5: 6 INT6 pending 7 5
INT 6 CPL=6 MAIN CPL=7
4.5 ARBITRATION MODES The ST9 provides two interrupt arbitration modes: Concurrent mode and Nested mode. Concurrent mode is the standard interrupt arbitration mode. Nested mode improves the effective interrupt response time when service routine nesting is required, depending on the request priority levels.
The IAM control bit in the CICR Register selects Concurrent Arbitration mode or Nested Arbitration Mode. 4.5.1 Concurrent Mode This mode is selected when the IAM bit is cleared (reset condition). The arbitration phase, performed during every instruction, selects the request with the highest priority level. The CPL value is not modified in this mode. Start of Interrupt Routine The interrupt cycle performs the following steps: - All maskable interrupt requests are disabled by clearing CICR.IEN. - The PC low byte is pushed onto system stack. - The PC high byte is pushed onto system stack. - If ENCSR is set, CSR is pushed onto system stack. - The Flag register is pushed onto system stack. - The PC is loaded with the 16-bit vector stored in the Vector Table, pointed to by the IVR. - If ENCSR is set, CSR is loaded with ISR contents; otherwise ISR is used in place of CSR until iret instruction. End of Interrupt Routine The Interrupt Service Routine must be ended with the iret instruction. The iret instruction executes the following operations: - The Flag register is popped from system stack. - If ENCSR is set, CSR is popped from system stack. - The PC high byte is popped from system stack. - The PC low byte is popped from system stack. - All unmasked Interrupts are enabled by setting the CICR.IEN bit. - If ENCSR is reset, CSR is used instead of ISR. Normal program execution thus resumes at the interrupted instruction. All pending interrupts remain pending until the next ei instruction (even if it is executed during the interrupt service routine). Note: In Concurrent mode, the source priority level is only useful during the arbitration phase, where it is compared with all other priority levels and with the CPL. No trace is kept of its value during the ISR. If other requests are issued during the interrupt service routine, once the global CICR.IEN is re-enabled, they will be acknowledged regardless of the interrupt service routine's priority. This may cause undesirable interrupt response sequences.
50/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont'd) Examples In the following two examples, three interrupt requests with different priority levels (2, 3 & 4) occur simultaneously during the interrupt 5 service routine.
Example 1 In the first example, (simplest case, Figure 21) the ei instruction is not used within the interrupt service routines. This means that no new interrupt can be serviced in the middle of the current one. The interrupt routines will thus be serviced one after another, in the order of their priority, until the main program eventually resumes.
Figure 21. Simple Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with: - Concurrent mode selected and - IEN unchanged by the interrupt routines
0 Priority Level of Interrupt Request
INTERRUPT 2 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 2 INTERRUPT 3 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 3 INTERRUPT 4 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 4 INTERRUPT 5 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 5
1
2
INT 2 CPL = 7 INT 3 CPL = 7 INT 2 INT 3 INT 4 INT 5 ei CPL = 7 INT 4 CPL = 7
3
4
5
6 INT 5 7 MAIN CPL is set to 7 MAIN CPL = 7
51/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont'd) Example 2 In the second example, (more complex, Figure 22), each interrupt service routine sets Interrupt Enable with the ei instruction at the beginning of the routine. Placed here, it minimizes response time for requests with a higher priority than the one being serviced. The level 2 interrupt routine (with the highest priority) will be acknowledged first, then, when the ei instruction is executed, it will be interrupted by the level 3 interrupt routine, which itself will be interrupted by the level 4 interrupt routine. When the level 4 interrupt routine is completed, the level 3 interrupt routine resumes and finally the level 2 interrupt routine. This results in the three interrupt serv-
ice routines being executed in the opposite order of their priority. It is therefore recommended to avoid inserting the ei instruction in the interrupt service routine in Concurrent mode. Use the ei instruction only in nested mode. WARNING: If, in Concurrent Mode, interrupts are nested (by executing ei in an interrupt service routine), make sure that either ENCSR is set or CSR=ISR, otherwise the iret of the innermost interrupt will make the CPU use CSR instead of ISR before the outermost interrupt service routine is terminated, thus making the outermost routine fail.
Figure 22. Complex Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with: - Concurrent mode selected - IEN set to 1 during interrupt service routine execution
0 Priority Level of Interrupt Request
INTERRUP T 2 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 2 INTERRUP T 3 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 3 INTERRUP T 4 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 4 INTERRUP T 5 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 5
1
2
INT 2 CPL = 7
INT 2 CPL = 7 INT 3 CPL = 7 ei INT 4 CPL = 7 INT 5 CPL = 7 INT 3 CPL = 7
3 INT 2 INT 3 INT 4 INT 5 ei 6 INT 5 7 MAIN CPL is set to 7 CPL = 7 ei
ei
4
5
ei
MAIN CPL = 7
52/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont'd) 4.5.2 Nested Mode The difference between Nested mode and Concurrent mode, lies in the modification of the Current Priority Level (CPL) during interrupt processing. The arbitration phase is basically identical to Concurrent mode, however, once the request is acknowledged, the CPL is saved in the Nested Interrupt Control Register (NICR) by setting the NICR bit corresponding to the CPL value (i.e. if the CPL is 3, the bit 3 will be set). The CPL is then loaded with the priority of the request just acknowledged; the next arbitration cycle is thus performed with reference to the priority of the interrupt service routine currently being executed. Start of Interrupt Routine The interrupt cycle performs the following steps:
- All maskable interrupt requests are disabled by clearing CICR.IEN. - CPL is saved in the special NICR stack to hold the priority level of the suspended routine. - Priority level of the acknowledged routine is stored in CPL, so that the next request priority will be compared with the one of the routine currently being serviced. - The PC low byte is pushed onto system stack. - The PC high byte is pushed onto system stack. - If ENCSR is set, CSR is pushed onto system stack. - The Flag register is pushed onto system stack. - The PC is loaded with the 16-bit vector stored in the Vector Table, pointed to by the IVR. - If ENCSR is set, CSR is loaded with ISR contents; otherwise ISR is used in place of CSR until iret instruction.
Figure 23. Simple Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with: - Nested mode - IEN unchanged by the interrupt routines
Priority Level of Interrupt Request 0 INT 0 CPL=0 CPL6 > CPL3: INT6 pending
INTE RRUPT 0 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 0 INTE RRUPT 2 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 2 INTE RRUPT 3 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 3 INTE RRUPT 4 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 4 INTE RRUPT 5 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 5 INTE RRUPT 6 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 6
1 INT0 2 INT 2 CPL=2
INT6 INT 3 CPL=3
INT 2 CPL=2
3 INT2 INT3 INT4 INT 5 CPL=5
INT2 INT 4 CPL=4
4
5 ei 6 INT5 7
CPL2 < CPL4: Serviced next
INT 6 CPL=6 MAIN CPL=7
MAIN CPL is set to 7
53/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont'd) End of Interrupt Routine The iret Interrupt Return instruction executes the following steps: - The Flag register is popped from system stack. - If ENCSR is set, CSR is popped from system stack. - The PC high byte is popped from system stack. - The PC low byte is popped from system stack. - All unmasked Interrupts are enabled by setting the CICR.IEN bit. - The priority level of the interrupted routine is popped from the special register (NICR) and copied into CPL.
- If ENCSR is reset, CSR is used instead of ISR, unless the program returns to another nested routine. The suspended routine thus resumes at the interrupted instruction. Figure 23 contains a simple example, showing that if the ei instruction is not used in the interrupt service routines, nested and concurrent modes are equivalent. Figure 24 contains a more complex example showing how nested mode allows nested interrupt processing (enabled inside the interrupt service routinesi using the ei instruction) according to their priority level.
Figure 24. Complex Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with: - Nested mode - IEN set to 1 during the interrupt routine execution
Priority Level of Interrupt Request 0
INTERRUPT 0 HAS PRIORI TY LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT 2 HAS PRIORI TY LEVEL 2
INT 0 CPL=0 CPL6 > CPL3: INT6 pending INT 2 CPL=2 INT 2 CPL=2
INTERRUPT 3 HAS PRIORI TY LEVEL 3 INTERRUPT 4 HAS PRIORI TY LEVEL 4 INTERRUPT 5 HAS PRIORI TY LEVEL 5 INTERRUPT 6 HAS PRIORI TY LEVEL 6
1 INT0 2 INT 2 CPL=2 ei INT2 INT3 INT4 INT 5 CPL=5 ei ei INT5 7 MAIN CPL is set to 7
INT6 INT 3 CPL=3
3
INT2 INT 4 CPL=4 ei INT 4 CPL=4 INT 5 CPL=5 INT 6 CPL=6 MAIN CPL=7
4
ei CPL2 < CPL4: Serviced just after ei
5
6
54/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
4.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS The standard ST9 core contains 8 external interrupts sources grouped into four pairs. Table 10. External Interrupt Channel Grouping
External Interrupt INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0 Channel INTD1 INTD0 INTC1 INTC0 INTB1 INTB0
n
Figure 25. Priority Level Examples
PL2 D PL1D PL2 C PL1 C PL2B PL1B PL2A PL1A
1
SOURCE PRIORITY
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
EIPLR
SOURCE PRIORITY
INT.D0: 100=4 INT.D1: 101=5 INT.C0: 000=0 INT.C1: 001=1
INT.A0: 010=2 INT.A1: 011=3 INT.B0: 100=4 INT.B1: 101=5 VR000151
INTA1 INTA0
Each source has a trigger control bit TEA0,..TED1 (R242,EITR.0,..,7 Page 0) to select triggering on the rising or falling edge of the external pin. If the Trigger control bit is set to "1", the corresponding pending bit IPA0,..,IPD1 (R243,EIPR.0,..,7 Page 0) is set on the input pin rising edge, if it is cleared, the pending bit is set on the falling edge of the input pin. Each source can be individually masked through the corresponding control bit IMA0,..,IMD1 (EIMR.7,..,0). See Figure 26. The priority level of the external interrupt sources can be programmed among the eight priority levels with the control register EIPLR (R245). The priority level of each pair is software defined using the bits PRL2, PRL1. For each pair, the even channel (A0,B0,C0,D0) of the group has the even priority level and the odd channel (A1,B1,C1,D1) has the odd (lower) priority level.
Figure 25 shows an example of priority levels. Figure 26 gives an overview of the External interrupt control bits and vectors. - The source of the interrupt channel A0 can be selected between the external pin INT0 (when IA0S = "1", the reset value) or the On-chip Timer/ Watchdog peripheral (when IA0S = "0"). - The source of the interrupt channel B0 can be selected between the external pin INT2 (when (SPEN,BMS)=(0,0)) or the on-chip SPI peripheral. - The source of the interrupt channel C0 can be selected between the external pin INT4 (when INTS = "1") or the on-chip Standard Timer. - The source of the interrupt channel D0 can be selected between the external pin INT6 (when INT_SEL = "0") or the on-chip RCCU. Warning: When using channels shared by both external interrupts and peripherals, special care must be taken to configure their control registers for both peripherals and interrupts. Table 11. Multiplexed Interrupt Sources
Channel INTA0 Internal Interrupt Source Timer/Watchdog External Interrupt Source INT0
55/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS (Cont'd) Figure 26. External Interrupts Control Bits and Vectors
n
Watchdog/Timer IA0S End of count TEA0 "0" INT 0 pin "1"
V7 V6 V5 V4 0 0 VECTOR Priority level PL2A PL1A 0 Mask bit IMA0 TEA1 V7 V6 V5 V4 0 0 VECTOR Priority level PL2A PL1A 1 Mask bit IMA1
00 INT A0 request
Pending bit IPA0
*
INT 1 pin SPEN,BM S TEB0 SPI Interrupt
10 INT A1 request
Pending bit IPA1
V7 V6 V5 V4 0 1 VECTO R Priority level PL2B PL1B 0 INT 2 pin "0,0" Mask bit IMB0 TEB1 V7 V6 V5 V4 0 1 VECTOR Priority level PL2B PL1B 1 Mask bit IMB1 INTS TEC0 STD Timer "0" INT 4 pin "1" V7 V6 V5 V4 1 0 VECTO R PL2C PL1C 0 Priority level Mask bit IMC0 TEC1 V7 V6 V5 V4 1 0 VECTOR PL2C PL1C 1 Priority level Mask bit IMC1 INT_SEL TED0 RCCU "1" INT 6 pin "0" V7 V6 V5 V4 1 1 VECTOR PL2D PL1D 0 Priority level Mask bit IMD0 TED1 V7 V6 V5 V4 1 1 VECTOR Priority level PL2D PL1D 1 Mask bit IMD1 *
00 INT B0 request
Pending bit IPB0
*
INT 3 pin
10 INT B1 request
Pending bit IPB1
00 INT C0 request
*
Pending bit IPC0
10 INT C1 request
INT 5 pin
Pending bit IPC1
00 INT D0 request
Pending bit IPD0
*
10 INT D1 request
INT 7 pin
Pending bit IPD1
Shared channels, see warning
n
56/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
4.7 TOP LEVEL INTERRUPT The Top Level Interrupt channel can be assigned either to the external pin NMI or to the Timer/ Watchdog according to the status of the control bit EIVR.TLIS (R246.2, Page 0). If this bit is high (the reset condition) the source is the external pin NMI. If it is low, the source is the Timer/ Watchdog End Of Count. When the source is the NMI external pin, the control bit EIVR.TLTEV (R246.3; Page 0) selects between the rising (if set) or falling (if reset) edge generating the interrupt request. When the selected event occurs, the CICR.TLIP bit (R230.6) is set. Depending on the mask situation, a Top Level Interrupt request may be generated. Two kinds of masks are available, a Maskable mask and a Non-Maskable mask. The first mask is the CICR.TLI bit (R230.5): it can be set or cleared to enable or disable respectively the Top Level Interrupt request. If it is enabled, the global Enable Interrupt bit, CICR.IEN (R230.4) must also be enabled in order to allow a Top Level Request. The second mask NICR.TLNM (R247.7) is a setonly mask. Once set, it enables the Top Level Interrupt request independently of the value of CICR.IEN and it cannot be cleared by the program. Only the processor RESET cycle can clear this bit. This does not prevent the user from ignoring some sources due to a change in TLIS. The Top Level Interrupt Service Routine cannot be interrupted by any other interrupt or DMA request, in any arbitration mode, not even by a subsequent Top Level Interrupt request. Figure 27. Top Level Interrupt Structure
n
Warning. The interrupt machine cycle of the Top Level Interrupt does not clear the CICR.IEN bit, and the corresponding iret does not set it. Furthermore the TLI never modifies the CPL bits and the NICR register. 4.8 ON-CHIP PERIPHERAL INTERRUPTS The general structure of the peripheral interrupt unit is described here, however each on-chip peripheral has its own specific interrupt unit containing one or more interrupt channels, or DMA channels. Please refer to the specific peripheral chapter for the description of its interrupt features and control registers. The on-chip peripheral interrupt channels provide the following control bits: - Interrupt Pending bit (IP). Set by hardware when the Trigger Event occurs. Can be set/ cleared by software to generate/cancel pending interrupts and give the status for Interrupt polling. - Interrupt Mask bit (IM). If IM = "0", no interrupt request is generated. If IM ="1" an interrupt request is generated whenever IP = "1" and CICR.IEN = "1". - Priority Level (PRL, 3 bits). These bits define the current priority level, PRL=0: the highest priority, PRL=7: the lowest priority (the interrupt cannot be acknowledged) - Interrupt Vector Register (IVR, up to 7 bits). The IVR points to the vector table which itself contains the interrupt routine start address.
WATCHDOG ENABLE WDEN
CORE RESET TLIP MUX PENDING TOP LEVEL INTERRUPT REQUEST
WATCHDOG TIMER END OF COUNT
MASK NMI OR TLIS
TLTEV TLNM TLI IEN
n
VA00294
57/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
4.9 INTERRUPT RESPONSE TIME The interrupt arbitration protocol functions completely asynchronously from instruction flow and requires 5 clock cycles. One more CPUCLK cycle is required when an interrupt is acknowledged. Requests are sampled every 5 CPUCLK cycles. If the interrupt request comes from an external pin, the trigger event must occur a minimum of one INTCLK cycle before the sampling time. When an arbitration results in an interrupt request being generated, the interrupt logic checks if the current instruction (which could be at any stage of execution) can be safely aborted; if this is the case, instruction execution is terminated immediately and the interrupt request is serviced; if not, the CPU waits until the current instruction is terminated and then services the request. Instruction execution can normally be aborted provided no write operation has been performed. For an interrupt deriving from an external interrupt channel, the response time between a user event and the start of the interrupt service routine can range from a minimum of 26 clock cycles to a maximum of 55 clock cycles (DIV instruction), 53 clock
cycles (DIVWS and MUL instructions) or 49 for other instructions. For a non-maskable Top Level interrupt, the response time between a user event and the start of the interrupt service routine can range from a minimum of 22 clock cycles to a maximum of 51 clock cycles (DIV instruction), 49 clock cycles (DIVWS and MUL instructions) or 45 for other instructions. In order to guarantee edge detection, input signals must be kept low/high for a minimum of one INTCLK cycle. An interrupt machine cycle requires a basic 18 internal clock cycles (CPUCLK), to which must be added a further 2 clock cycles if the stack is in the Register File. 2 more clock cycles must further be added if the CSR is pushed (ENCSR =1). The interrupt machine cycle duration forms part of the two examples of interrupt response time previously quoted; it includes the time required to push values on the stack, as well as interrupt vector handling. In Wait for Interrupt mode, a further cycle is required as wake-up delay.
58/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
4.10 INTERRUPT REGISTERS CENTRAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (CICR) R230 - Read/Write Register Group: System Reset value: 1000 0111 (87h)
7 GCEN TLIP TLI IEN IAM 0 CPL2 CPL1 CPL0
the IEN bit when interrupts are disabled or when no peripheral can generate interrupts. For example, if the state of IEN is not known in advance, and its value must be restored from a previous push of CICR on the stack, use the sequence DI; POP CICR to make sure that no interrupts are being arbitrated when CICR is modified. Bit 3 = IAM: Interrupt Arbitration Mode. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Concurrent Mode 1: Nested Mode Bit 2:0 = CPL[2:0]: Current Priority Level. These bits define the Current Priority Level. CPL=0 is the highest priority. CPL=7 is the lowest priority. These bits may be modified directly by the interrupt hardware when Nested Interrupt Mode is used. EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TRIGGER REGISTER (EITR) R242 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
Bit 7 = GCEN: Global Counter Enable. This bit enables the 16-bit Multifunction Timer peripheral. 0: MFT disabled 1: MFT enabled Bit 6 = TLIP: Top Level Interrupt Pending. This bit is set by hardware when Top Level Interrupt (TLI) trigger event occurs. It is cleared by hardware when a TLI is acknowledged. It can also be set by software to implement a software TLI. 0: No TLI pending 1: TLI pending Bit 5 = TLI: Top Level Interrupt. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: A Top Level Interrupt is generared when TLIP is set, only if TLNM=1 in the NICR register (independently of the value of the IEN bit). 1: A Top Level Interrupt request is generated when IEN=1 and the TLIP bit are set. Bit 4 = IEN: Interrupt Enable. This bit is cleared by the interrupt machine cycle (except for a TLI). It is set by the iret instruction (except for a return from TLI). It is set by the EI instruction. It is cleared by the DI instruction. 0: Maskable interrupts disabled 1: Maskable Interrupts enabled Note: The IEN bit can also be changed by software using any instruction that operates on register CICR, however in this case, take care to avoid spurious interrupts, since IEN cannot be cleared in the middle of an interrupt arbitration. Only modify
TED1 TED0 TEC1 TEC0 TEB1 TEB0 TEA1 TEA0
Bit 7 = TED1: INTD1 Trigger Event Bit 6 = TED0: INTD0 Trigger Event Bit 5 = TEC1: INTC1 Trigger Event Bit 4 = TEC0: INTC0 Trigger Event Bit 3 = TEB1: INTB1 Trigger Event Bit 2 = TEB0: INTB0 Trigger Event Bit 1 = TEA1: INTA1 Trigger Event Bit 0 = TEA0: INTA0 Trigger Event These bits are set and cleared by software. 0: Select falling edge as interrupt trigger event 1: Select rising edge as interrupt trigger event
59/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont'd) EXTERNAL INTERRUPT PENDING REGISTER (EIPR) R243 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 IPD1 IPD0 IPC1 IPC0 IPB1 IPB0 0 IPA1 IPA0
Bit 3 = IMB1: INTB1 Interrupt Mask Bit 2 = IMB0: INTB0 Interrupt Mask Bit 1 = IMA1: INTA1 Interrupt Mask Bit 0 = IMA0: INTA0 Interrupt Mask These bits are set and cleared by software. 0: Interrupt masked 1: Interrupt not masked (an interrupt is generated if the IPxx and IEN bits = 1) EXTERNAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER (EIPLR) R245 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
Bit 7 = IPD1: INTD1 Interrupt Pending bit Bit 6 = IPD0: INTD0 Interrupt Pending bit Bit 5 = IPC1: INTC1 Interrupt Pending bit Bit 4 = IPC0: INTC0 Interrupt Pending bit Bit 3 = IPB1: INTB1 Interrupt Pending bit Bit 2 = IPB0: INTB0 Interrupt Pending bit Bit 1 = IPA1: INTA1 Interrupt Pending bit Bit 0 = IPA0: INTA0 Interrupt Pending bit These bits are set by hardware on occurrence of a trigger event (as specified in the EITR register) and are cleared by hardware on interrupt acknowledge. They can also be set by software to implement a software interrupt. 0: No interrupt pending 1: Interrupt pending EXTERNAL INTERRUPT MASK-BIT REGISTER (EIMR) R244 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
LEVEL
0
PL2D PL1D PL2C PL1C PL2B PL1B PL2A PL1A
Bit 7:6 = PL2D, PL1D: INTD0, D1 Priority Level. Bit 5:4 = PL2C, PL1C: INTC0, C1 Priority Level. Bit 3:2 = PL2B, PL1B: INTB0, B1 Priority Level. Bit 1:0 = PL2A, PL1A: INTA0, A1 Priority Level. These bits are set and cleared by software. The priority is a three-bit value. The LSB is fixed by hardware at 0 for Channels A0, B0, C0 and D0 and at 1 for Channels A1, B1, C1 and D1.
PL2x 0 0 PL1x 0 1 0 1 Hardware bit 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Priority 0 (Highest) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (Lowest)
IMD1 IMD0 IMC1 IMC0 IMB1 IMB0 IMA1 IMA0 1
Bit 7 = IMD1: INTD1 Interrupt Mask Bit 6 = IMD0: INTD0 Interrupt Mask Bit 5 = IMC1: INTC1 Interrupt Mask Bit 4 = IMC0: INTC0 Interrupt Mask
1
60/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont'd) EXTERNAL INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (EIVR) R246 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: xxxx 0110b (x6h)
7 V7 V6 V5 V4 0 TLTEV TLIS IAOS EWEN
0: WAITN pin disabled 1: WAITN pin enabled (to stretch the external memory access cycle). Note: For more details on Wait mode refer to the section describing the WAITN pin in the External Memory Chapter. NESTED INTERRUPT CONTROL (NICR) R247 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 TLNM HL6 HL5 HL4 HL3 HL2 HL1 0 HL0
Bit 7:4 = V[7:4]: Most significant nibble of External Interrupt Vector. These bits are not initialized by reset. For a representation of how the full vector is generated from V[7:4] and the selected external interrupt channel, refer to Figure 26. Bit 3 = TLTEV: Top Level Trigger Event bit. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Select falling edge as NMI trigger event 1: Select rising edge as NMI trigger event Bit 2 = TLIS: Top Level Input Selection. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Watchdog End of Count is TL interrupt source 1: NMI is TL interrupt source Bit 1 = IA0S: Interrupt Channel A0 Selection. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Watchdog End of Count is INTA0 source 1: External Interrupt pin is INTA0 source Bit 0 = EWEN: External Wait Enable. This bit is set and cleared by software.
Bit 7 = TLNM: Top Level Not Maskable. This bit is set by software and cleared only by a hardware reset. 0: Top Level Interrupt Maskable. A top level request is generated if the IEN, TLI and TLIP bits =1 1: Top Level Interrupt Not Maskable. A top level request is generated if the TLIP bit =1 Bit 6:0 = HL[6:0]: Hold Level x These bits are set by hardware when, in Nested Mode, an interrupt service routine at level x is interrupted from a request with higher priority (other than the Top Level interrupt request). They are cleared by hardware at the iret execution when the routine at level x is recovered.
61/190
9
ST90158 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont'd) EXTERNAL MEMORY REGISTER 2 (EMR2) R246 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: 0000 1111 (0Fh)
7 0 ENCSR 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Bit 7, 5:0 = Reserved, keep in reset state. Refer to the external Memory Interface Chapter. Bit 6 = ENCSR: Enable Code Segment Register. This bit is set and cleared by software. It affects the ST9 CPU behaviour whenever an interrupt request is issued. 0: The CPU works in original ST9 compatibility mode. For the duration of the interrupt service routine, ISR is used instead of CSR, and the interrupt stack frame is identical to that of the original ST9: only the PC and Flags are pushed. This avoids saving the CSR on the stack in the event of an interrupt, thus ensuring a faster in-
terrupt response time. The drawback is that it is not possible for an interrupt service routine to perform inter-segment calls or jumps: these instructions would update the CSR, which, in this case, is not used (ISR is used instead). The code segment size for all interrupt service routines is thus limited to 64K bytes. 1: ISR is only used to point to the interrupt vector table and to initialize the CSR at the beginning of the interrupt service routine: the old CSR is pushed onto the stack together with the PC and flags, and CSR is then loaded with the contents of ISR. In this case, iret will also restore CSR from the stack. This approach allows interrupt service routines to access the entire 4 Mbytes of address space; the drawback is that the interrupt response time is slightly increased, because of the need to also save CSR on the stack. Full compatibility with the original ST9 is lost in this case, because the interrupt stack frame is different; this difference, however, should not affect the vast majority of programs.
62/190
9
ST90158 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
5 ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
5.1 INTRODUCTION The ST9 includes on-chip Direct Memory Access (DMA) in order to provide high-speed data transfer between peripherals and memory or Register File. Multi-channel DMA is fully supported by peripherals having their own controller and DMA channel(s). Each DMA channel transfers data to or from contiguous locations in the Register File, or in Memory. The maximum number of bytes that can be transferred per transaction by each DMA channel is 222 with the Register File, or 65536 with Memory. The DMA controller in the Peripheral uses an indirect addressing mechanism to DMA Pointers and Counter Registers stored in the Register File. This is the reason why the maximum number of transactions for the Register File is 222, since two Registers are allocated for the Pointer and Counter. Register pairs are used for memory pointers and counters in order to offer the full 65536 byte and count capability. Figure 28. DMA Data Transfer
REGISTER FILE REGISTER FILE OR MEMORY
5.2 DMA PRIORITY LEVELS The 8 priority levels used for interrupts are also used to prioritize the DMA requests, which are arbitrated in the same arbitration phase as interrupt requests. If the event occurrence requires a DMA transaction, this will take place at the end of the current instruction execution. When an interrupt and a DMA request occur simultaneously, on the same priority level, the DMA request is serviced before the interrupt. An interrupt priority request must be strictly higher than the CPL value in order to be acknowledged, whereas, for a DMA transaction request, it must be equal to or higher than the CPL value in order to be executed. Thus only DMA transaction requests can be acknowledged when the CPL=0. DMA requests do not modify the CPL value, since the DMA transaction is not interruptable.
DF REGISTER FILE
GROUP F PERIPHERAL PAGED REGISTERS
PERIPHERAL
COUNTER ADDRESS
DATA
0 COUNTER VALUE
TRANSFERRED DATA
START ADDRESS
VR001834
63/190
9
ST90158 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
5.3 DMA TRANSACTIONS The purpose of an on-chip DMA channel is to transfer a block of data between a peripheral and the Register File, or Memory. Each DMA transfer consists of three operations: - A load from/to the peripheral data register to/ from a location of Register File (or Memory) addressed through the DMA Address Register (or Register pair) - A post-increment of the DMA Address Register (or Register pair) - A post-decrement of the DMA transaction counter, which contains the number of transactions that have still to be performed. If the DMA transaction is carried out between the peripheral and the Register File (Figure 29), one register is required to hold the DMA Address, and one to hold the DMA transaction counter. These two registers must be located in the Register File: the DMA Address Register in the even address
register, and the DMA Transaction Counter in the next register (odd address). They are pointed to by the DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register (DCPR), located in the peripheral's paged registers. In order to select a DMA transaction with the Register File, the control bit DCPR.RM (bit 0 of DCPR) must be set. If the transaction is made between the peripheral and Memory, a register pair (16 bits) is required for the DMA Address and the DMA Transaction Counter (Figure 30). Thus, two register pairs must be located in the Register File. The DMA Transaction Counter is pointed to by the DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register (DCPR), the DMA Address is pointed to by the DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR),both DCPR and DAPR are located in the paged registers of the peripheral.
Figure 29. DMA Between Register File and Peripheral
IDCR IVR DAPR DCPR DATA PERIPHERAL PAGED REGISTERS DMA TRANSACTION
FFh
PAGED REGISTERS
F0h EFh 0100h
END OF BLOCK INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE
SYSTEM REGISTERS
E0h DFh 0000h
ISR ADDRESS
VECTOR TABLE
MEMORY
DMA TABLE
DATA ALREADY TRANSFERRED
DMA COUNTER DMA ADDRESS REGISTER FILE
64/190
9
ST90158 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
DMA TRANSACTIONS (Cont'd) When selecting the DMA transaction with memory, bit DCPR.RM (bit 0 of DCPR) must be cleared. To select between using the ISR or the DMASR register to extend the address, (see Memory Management Unit chapter), the control bit DAPR.PS (bit 0 of DAPR) must be cleared or set respectively. The DMA transaction Counter must be initialized with the number of transactions to perform and will be decremented after each transaction. The DMA Address must be initialized with the starting address of the DMA table and is increased after each transaction. These two registers must be located between addresses 00h and DFh of the Register File. Once a DMA channel is initialized, a transfer can start. The direction of the transfer is automatically defined by the type of peripheral and programming mode. Once the DMA table is completed (the transaction counter reaches 0 value), an Interrupt request to the CPU is generated. Figure 30. DMA Between Memory and Peripheral
IDCR IVR DAPR DCPR DATA PERIPHERAL PAGED REGISTERS
F0h EFh
When the Interrupt Pending (IP) bit is set by a hardware event (or by software), and the DMA Mask bit (DM) is set, a DMA request is generated. If the Priority Level of the DMA source is higher than, or equal to, the Current Priority Level (CPL), the DMA transfer is executed at the end of the current instruction. DMA transfers read/write data from/to the location pointed to by the DMA Address Register, the DMA Address register is incremented and the Transaction Counter Register is decremented. When the contents of the Transaction Counter are decremented to zero, the DMA Mask bit (DM) is cleared and an interrupt request is generated, according to the Interrupt Mask bit (End of Block interrupt). This End-of-Block interrupt request is taken into account, depending on the PRL value. WARNING. DMA requests are not acknowledged if the top level interrupt service is in progress.
DMA TRANSACTION
FFh
PAGED REGISTERS DMA TABLE SYSTEM REGISTERS
E0h DFh
DATA ALREADY TRANSFERRED
DMA TRANSACTION COUNTER
END OF BLOCK INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE
0100h
DMA ADDRESS
0000h
ISR ADDRESS MEMORY
VECTOR TABLE
REGISTER FILE
n
65/190
9
ST90158 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
DMA TRANSACTIONS (Cont'd) 5.4 DMA CYCLE TIME The interrupt and DMA arbitration protocol functions completely asynchronously from instruction flow. Requests are sampled every 5 CPUCLK cycles. DMA transactions are executed if their priority allows it. A DMA transfer with the Register file requires 8 CPUCLK cycles. A DMA transfer with memory requires 16 CPUCLK cycles, plus any required wait states. 5.5 SWAP MODE An extra feature which may be found on the DMA channels of some peripherals (e.g. the MultiFunction Timer) is the Swap mode. This feature allows
n
transfer from two DMA tables alternatively. All the DMA descriptors in the Register File are thus doubled. Two DMA transaction counters and two DMA address pointers allow the definition of two fully independent tables (they only have to belong to the same space, Register File or Memory). The DMA transaction is programmed to start on one of the two tables (say table 0) and, at the end of the block, the DMA controller automatically swaps to the other table (table 1) by pointing to the other DMA descriptors. In this case, the DMA mask (DM bit) control bit is not cleared, but the End Of Block interrupt request is generated to allow the optional updating of the first data table (table 0). Until the swap mode is disabled, the DMA controller will continue to swap between DMA Table 0 and DMA Table 1.
66/190
9
ST90158 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
5.6 DMA REGISTERS As each peripheral DMA channel has its own specific control registers, the following register list should be considered as a general example. The names and register bit allocations shown here may be different from those found in the peripheral chapters. DMA COUNTER POINTER REGISTER (DCPR) Read/Write Address set by Peripheral Reset value: undefined
7 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 0 RM
Bit 3 = IM: End of block Interrupt Mask. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: No End of block interrupt request is generated when IP is set 1: End of Block interrupt is generated when IP is set. DMA requests depend on the DM bit value as shown in the table below.
DM IM Meaning A DMA request generated without End of Block 1 0 interrupt when IP=1 A DMA request generated with End of Block in1 1 terrupt when IP=1 No End of block interrupt or DMA request is 0 0 generated when IP=1 An End of block Interrupt is generated without 0 1 associated DMA request (not used)
Bit 7:1 = C[7:1]: DMA Transaction Counter Pointer. Software should write the pointer to the DMA Transaction Counter in these bits. Bit 0 = RM: Register File/Memory Selector. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: DMA transactions are with memory (see also DAPR.DP) 1: DMA transactions are with the Register File GENERIC EXTERNAL PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT AND DMA CONTROL (IDCR) Read/Write Address set by Peripheral Reset value: undefined
7 IP DM IM 0 PRL2 PRL1 PRL0
Bit 2:0 = PRL[2:0]: Source Priority Level. These bits are set and cleared by software. Refer to Section 5.2 DMA PRIORITY LEVELS for a description of priority levels.
PRL2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 PRL1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 PRL0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Source Priority Level 0 Highest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Lowest
DMA ADDRESS POINTER REGISTER (DAPR) Read/Write Address set by Peripheral Reset value: undefined
7 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 0 PS
Bit 5 = IP: Interrupt Pending. This bit is set by hardware when the Trigger Event occurs. It is cleared by hardware when the request is acknowledged. It can be set/cleared by software in order to generate/cancel a pending request. 0: No interrupt pending 1: Interrupt pending Bit 4 = DM: DMA Request Mask. This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared when the transaction counter reaches zero (unless SWAP mode is active). 0: No DMA request is generated when IP is set. 1: DMA request is generated when IP is set
Bit 7:1 = A[7:1]: DMA Address Register(s) Pointer Software should write the pointer to the DMA Address Register(s) in these bits. Bit 0 = PS: Memory Segment Pointer Selector: This bit is set and cleared by software. It is only meaningful if DAPR.RM=0. 0: The ISR register is used to extend the address of data transferred by DMA (see MMU chapter). 1: The DMASR register is used to extend the address of data transferred by DMA (see MMU chapter).
67/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
6 RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
6.1 INTRODUCTION The Reset and Clock Control Unit (RCCU) comprises two distinct sections: - the Clock Control Unit, which generates and manages the internal clock signals. - the Reset/Stop Manager, which detects and flags Hardware, Software and Watchdog generated resets. On ST9 devices where the external Stop pin is available, this circuit also detects and manages the externally triggered Stop mode, during which all oscillators are frozen in order to achieve the lowest possible power consumption. 6.2 CLOCK CONTROL UNIT ble of multiplying the clock frequency by a factor of 6, 8, 10 or 14; the multiplied clock is then divided by a programmable divider, by a factor of 1 to 7. By this means, the ST9 can operate with cheaper, medium frequency (3-5 MHz) crystals, while still providing a high frequency internal clock for maximum system performance; the range of available multiplication and division factors allow a great number of operating clock frequencies to be derived from a single crystal frequency. For low power operation, especially in Wait for Interrupt mode, the Clock Multiplier unit may be turned off, whereupon the output clock signal may be programmed as CLOCK2 divided by 16. For further power reduction, a low frequency external clock connected to the CK_AF pin may be selected, whereupon the crystal controlled main oscillator may be turned off. The internal system clock, INTCLK, is routed to all on-chip peripherals, as well as to the programmable Clock Prescaler Unit which generates the clock for the CPU core (CPUCLK). The Clock Prescaler is programmable and can slow the CPU clock by a factor of up to 8, allowing the programmer to reduce CPU processing speed, and thus power consumption, while maintaining a high speed clock to the peripherals. This is particularly useful when little actual processing is being done by the CPU and the peripherals are doing most of the work.
The Clock Control Unit generates the internal clocks for the CPU core (CPUCLK) and for the onchip peripherals (INTCLK). The Clock Control Unit may be driven by an external crystal circuit, connected to the OSCIN and OSCOUT pins, or by an external pulse generator, connected to OSCIN (see Figure 37 and Figure 39). 6.2.1 Clock Control Unit Overview As shown in Figure 31, a programmable divider can divide the CLOCK1 input clock signal by two. The divide-by-two is recommended in order to ensure a 50% duty cycle signal driving the PLL multiplier circuit. The resulting signal, CLOCK2, is the reference input clock to the programmable Phase Locked Loop frequency multiplier, which is capaFigure 31. Clock Control Unit Simplified Block Diagram
1/16
1/4
CLOCK2/64 to Standard Timer
PLL
Quartz oscillator
1/2
CLOCK1
CLOCK2
Clock Multiplier /Divider Unit
CPU Clock Prescaler
CPUCLK to CPU Core
CK_AF source
INTCLK to Peripherals CK_AF
68/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
6.3 CLOCK MANAGEMENT The various programmable features and operating modes of the CCU are handled by four registers: - MODER (Mode Register) - CLK_FLAG (Clock Flag Register) This is a System Register (R235, Group E). This is a Paged Register (R242, Page 55). The input clock divide-by-two and the CPU clock prescaler factors are handled by this register. - CLKCTL (Clock Control Register) This is a Paged Register (R240, Page 55). The low power modes and the interpretation of the HALT instruction are handled by this register. This register contains various status flags, as well as control bits for clock selection. - PLLCONF (PLL Configuration Register) This is a Paged Register (R246, Page 55). The PLL multiplication and division factors are programmed in this register.
Figure 32. Clock Control Unit Programming
XTSTOP
(CLK_FLAG)
DIV2
(MODER)
CSU_CKSEL
(CLK_FLAG)
CKAF_SEL
(CLKCTL)
1/16
0 0 Quartz oscillator
1/2 CLOCK1
1
CLOCK2
PLL x 6/8/10/14
0
0 1
INTCLK
to Peripherals and CPU Clock Prescaler
1
1/N
1
CK_AF source
CK_AF
MX(1:0)
DX(2:0)
XT_DIV16
CKAF_ST
(PLLCONF)
(CLK_FLAG)
Wait for Interrupt and Low Power Modes: LPOWFI (CLKCTL) selects Low Power operation automatically on entering WFI mode. WFI_CKSEL (CLKCTL) selects the CK_AF clock automatically, if present, on entering WFI mode. XTSTOP (CLK_FLAG) automatically stops the Xtal oscillator when the CK_AF clock is present and selected.
69/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK MANAGEMENT (Cont'd) 6.3.1 PLL Clock Multiplier Programming The CLOCK1 signal generated by the oscillator drives a programmable divide-by-two circuit. If the DIV2 control bit in MODER is set (Reset Condition), CLOCK2, is equal to CLOCK1 divided by two; if DIV2 is reset, CLOCK2 is identical to CLOCK1. Since the input clock to the Clock Multiplier circuit requires a 50% duty cycle for correct PLL operation, the divide by two circuit should be enabled when a crystal oscillator is used, or when the external clock generator does not provide a 50% duty cycle. In practice, the divide-by-two is virtually always used in order to ensure a 50% duty cycle signal to the PLL multiplier circuit. When the PLL is active, it multiplies CLOCK2 by 6, 8, 10 or 14, depending on the status of the MX0 -1 bits in PLLCONF. The multiplied clock is then divided by a factor in the range 1 to 7, determined by the status of the DX0-2 bits; when these bits are programmed to 111, the PLL is switched off. Following a RESET phase, programming bits DX0-2 to a value different from 111 will turn the PLL on. After allowing a stabilisation period for the PLL, setting the CSU_CKSEL bit in the CLK_FLAG Register selects the multiplier clock. The maximum frequency allowed for INTCLK is 24 MHz for 5V operation, and 16 MHz for 3V operation. Care is required, when programming the PLL multiplier and divider factors, not to exceed the maximum permissible operating frequency for INTCLK, according to supply voltage. The ST9 being a static machine, there is no lower limit for INTCLK. However, below 1MHz, A/D converter precision (if present) decreases. 6.3.2 CPU Clock Prescaling The system clock, INTCLK, which may be the output of the PLL clock multiplier, CLOCK2, CLOCK2/ 16 or CK_AF, drives a programmable prescaler which generates the basic time base, CPUCLK, for the instruction executer of the ST9 CPU core. This allows the user to slow down program execution during non processor intensive routines, thus reducing power dissipation. The internal peripherals are not affected by the CPUCLK prescaler and continue to operate at the full INTCLK frequency. This is particularly useful
when little processing is being done and the peripherals are doing most of the work. The prescaler divides the input clock by the value programmed in the control bits PRS2,1,0 in the MODER register. If the prescaler value is zero, no prescaling takes place, thus CPUCLK has the same period and phase as INTCLK. If the value is different from 0, the prescaling is equal to the value plus one, ranging thus from two (PRS2,1,0 = 1) to eight (PRS2,1,0 = 7). The clock generated is shown in Figure 33, and it will be noted that the prescaling of the clock does not preserve the 50% duty cycle, since the high level is stretched to replace the missing cycles. This is analogous to the introduction of wait cycles for access to external memory. When External Memory Wait or Bus Request events occur, CPUCLK is stretched at the high level for the whole period required by the function. Figure 33. CPU Clock Prescaling
INTCLK
PRS VALUE 000 001 010 011 CPUCLK 100 101 110 111 VA00260
6.3.3 Peripheral Clock The system clock, INTCLK, which may be the output of the PLL clock multiplier, CLOCK2, CLOCK2/ 16 or CK_AF, is also routed to all ST9 on-chip peripherals and acts as the central timebase for all timing functions.
70/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK MANAGEMENT (Cont'd) 6.3.4 Low Power Modes The user can select an automatic slowdown of clock frequency during Wait for Interrupt operation, thus idling in low power mode while waiting for an interrupt. In WFI operation the clock to the CPU core (CPUCLK) is stopped, thus suspending program execution, while the clock to the peripherals (INTCLK) may be programmed as described in the following paragraphs. Two examples of Low Power operation in WFI are illustrated in Figure 34 and Figure 35. If low power operation during WFI is disabled (LPOWFI bit = 0 in the CLKCTL Register), the CPU CLK is stopped but INTCLK is unchanged. If low power operation during Wait for Interrupt is enabled (LPOWFI bit = 1 in the CLKCTL Register), as soon as the CPU executes the WFI instruction, the PLL is turned off and the system clock will be forced to CLOCK2 divided by 16, or to the external low frequency clock, CK_AF, if this has been selected by setting WFI_CKSEL, and providing CKAF_ST is set, thus indicating that the external clock is selected and actually present on the CK_AF pin. If the external clock source is used, the crystal oscillator may be stopped by setting the XTSTOP bit, providing that the CK_AK clock is present and selected, indicated by CKAF_ST being set. The crystal oscillator will be stopped automatically on en-
tering WFI if the WFI_CKSEL bit has been set. It should be noted that selecting a non-existent CK_AF clock source is impossible, since such a selection requires that the auxiliary clock source be actually present and selected. In no event can a non-existent clock source be selected inadvertently. It is up to the user program to switch back to a faster clock on the occurrence of an interrupt, taking care to respect the oscillator and PLL stabilisation delays, as appropriate. It should be noted that any of the low power modes may also be selected explicitly by the user program even when not in Wait for Interrupt mode, by setting the appropriate bits. 6.3.5 Interrupt Generation System clock selection modifies the CLKCTL and CLK_FLAG registers. The clock control unit generates an external interrupt request when CK_AF and CLOCK2/16 are selected or deselected as system clock source, as well as when the system clock restarts after a hardware stop (when the STOP MODE feature is available on the specific device). This interrupt can be masked by resetting the INT_SEL bit in the CLKCTL register. Note that this is the only case in the ST9 where an an interrupt is generated with a high to low transition.
Table 12. Summary of Operating Modes using main Crystal Controlled Oscillator
MODE PLL x BY 14 PLL x BY 10 PLL x BY 8 PLL x BY 6 SLOW 1 SLOW 2 WAIT FOR INTERRUPT LOW POWER WAIT FOR INTERRUPT RESET EXAMPLE XTAL=4.4 MHz INTCLK XTAL/2 x (14/D) XTAL/2 x (10/D) XTAL/2 x (8/D) XTAL/2 x (6/D) XTAL/2 XTAL/32 CPUCLK INTCLK/N INTCLK/N INTCLK/N INTCLK/N INTCLK/N INTCLK/N DIV2 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRS0-2 CSU_CKSEL MX1-0 DX2-0 LPOWFI XT_DIV16 N-1 N-1 N-1 N-1 N-1 N-1 1 1 1 1 X X 10 00 11 01 X X D-1 D-1 D-1 D-1 111 X X X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 0
If LPOWFI=0, no changes occur on INTCLK, but CPUCLK is stopped anyway. XTAL/32 XTAL/2 2.2*10/2 = 11MHz STOP INTCLK 1 1 X 0 X 0 X 00 X 111 1 0 1 1
11MHz
1
0
1
00
001
X
1
71/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
Figure 34. Example of Low Power mode programming in WFI using CK_AF external clock
PROGRAM FLOW INTCLK FREQUENCY
FXtal = 4 MHz, VDD = 4.5 V min
Begin
Reset State PLL multiply factor set to 10 Divider factor set to 1, and PLL turned ON Wait for the PLL to lock T1* PLL is system clock source CK_AF clock selected in WFI state Preselect Xtal stopped when CK_AF selected Low Power Mode enabled in WFI state 20 MHz 2 MHz
MX(1:0) 00 DX2-0 000 WAIT CSU_CKSEL 1 WFI_CKSEL 1 XTSTOP 1 LPOWFI 1 User's Program
WFI instruction
Wait For Interrupt activated CK_AF selected and Xtal stopped automatically No code is executed until an interrupt is requested Interrupt serviced while CK_AF is the System Clock and the Xtal restarts Wait for the Xtal to stabilise The System Clock switches to Xtal Wait for the PLL to lock 2 MHz PLL is System Clock source T2**
Interrupt
WFI status Interrupt Routine XTSTOP 0 WAIT CKAF_SEL 0 WAIT CSU_CKSEL 1 User's Program
FCK_AF
Execution of user program resumes at full speed
20 MHz
* T1 = PLL lock-in time ** T2 = Crystal oscillator start-up time
72/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
Figure 35. Example of Low Power mode programming in WFI using CLOCK2/16
PROGRAM FLOW INTCLK FREQUENCY
FXtal = 4 MHz, VDD = 2.7 V min
Begin
Reset State PLL multiply factor set to 6 Divider factor set to 1, and PLL turned ON Wait for the PLL to lock PLL is system clock source Low Power Mode enabled in WFI state 2 MHz T1*
MX(1:0) 01 DX2-0 000 WAIT CSU_CKSEL 1 LPOWFI 1 User's Program
WFI instruction
Wait For Interrupt activated CLOCK2/16 selected and PLL stopped automatically
12 MHz
WFI status Interrupt Interrupt Routine
No code is executed until an interrupt is requested 125 KHz Interrupt serviced PLL switched on CLOCK2 selected
WAIT
Wait for the PLL to lock T1 *
2 MHz
CSU_CKSEL 1 User's Program
PLL is system clock source
Execution of user program resumes at full speed
12 MHz
* T1 = PLL lock-in time
73/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
6.4 CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS MODE REGISTER (MODER) R235 - Read/Write System Register Reset Value: 1110 0000 (E0h)
7
DIV2 PRS2 PRS1 PRS0 -
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CLKCTL) R240 - Read Write Register Page: 55 Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
0
-
7
INT_S EL SRESEN
0
CKAF_S WFI_CKS LPOW EL EL FI
*Note: This register contains bits which relate to other functions; these are described in the chapter dealing with Device Architecture. Only those bits relating to Clock functions are described here. Bit 5 = DIV2: OSCIN Divided by 2. This bit controls the divide by 2 circuit which operates on the OSCIN Clock. 0: No division of the OSCIN Clock 1: OSCIN clock is internally divided by 2 Bit 4:2 = PRS[2:0]: Clock Prescaling. These bits define the prescaler value used to prescale CPUCLK from INTCLK. When these three bits are reset, the CPUCLK is not prescaled, and is equal to INTCLK; in all other cases, the internal clock is prescaled by the value of these three bits plus one.
Bit 7 = INT_SEL: Interrupt Selection. 0: The external interrupt channel input signal is selected (Reset state) 1: Select the internal RCCU interrupt as the source of the interrupt request Bit 4:6 = Reserved for test purposes Must be kept reset for normal operation. Bit 3 = SRESEN: Software Reset Enable. 0: The HALT instruction turns off the quartz, the PLL and the CCU 1: A Reset is generated when HALT is executed Bit 2 = CKAF_SEL: Alternate Function Clock Select. 0: CK_AF clock not selected 1: Select CK_AF clock Note: To check if the selection has actually occurred, check that CKAF_ST is set. If no clock is present on the CK_AF pin, the selection will not occur. Bit 1 = WFI_CKSEL: WFI Clock Select. This bit selects the clock used in Low power WFI mode if LPOWFI = 1. 0: INTCLK during WFI is CLOCK2/16 1: INTCLK during WFI is CK_AF, providing it is present. In effect this bit sets CKAF_SEL in WFI mode WARNING: When the CK_AF is selected as Low Power WFI clock but the XTAL is not turned off (R242.4 = 0), after exiting from the WFI, CK_AF will be still selected as system clock. In this case, reset the R240.2 bit to switch back to the XT. Bit 0 = LPOWFI: Low Power mode during Wait For Interrupt. 0: Low Power mode during WFI disabled. When WFI is executed, the CPUCLK is stopped and INTCLK is unchanged 1: The ST9 enters Low Power mode when the WFI instruction is executed. The clock during this state depends on WFI_CKSEL
74/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS (Cont'd) CLOCK FLAG REGISTER (CLK_FLAG) R242 -Read/Write Register Page: 55 Reset Value: 0100 10x0 after a Watchdog Reset Reset Value: 0010 10x0 after a Software Reset Reset Value: 0000 10x0 after a Power-On Reset
7
EX_ WDGRE STP S SOFTRES XTSTOP XT_ DIV16 CKAF_ ST -
0
CSU_ CKSEL
previously been set to select the CK_AF clock during WFI. WARNING: When the program writes `1' to the XTSTOP bit, it will still be read as 0 and is only set when the CK_AF clock is running (CKAF_ST=1). Take care, as any operation such as a subsequent AND with ` 1' or an OR with ` 0' to the XTSTOP bit will reset it and the oscillator will not be stopped even if CKAF_ST is subsequently set. Bit 3 = XT_DIV16: CLOCK/16 Selection This bit is set and cleared by software. An interrupt is generated when the bit is toggled. 0: CLOCK2/16 is selected and the PLL is off 1: The input is CLOCK2 (or the PLL output depending on the value of CSU_CKSEL) WARNING: After this bit is modified from 0 to 1, take care that the PLL lock-in time has elapsed before setting the CSU_CKSEL bit. Bit 2 = CKAF_ST: (Read Only) If set, indicates that the alternate function clock has been selected. If no clock signal is present on the CK_AF pin, the selection will not occur. If reset, the PLL clock, CLOCK2 or CLOCK2/16 is selected (depending on bit 0). Bit 0 = CSU_CKSEL: CSU Clock Select This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also cleared by hardware when: - bits DX[2:0] (PLLCONF) are set to 111; - the quartz is stopped (by hardware or software); - WFI is executed while the LPOWFI bit is set; - the XT_DIV16 bit (CLK_FLAG) is forced to '0'. This prevents the PLL, when not yet locked, from providing an irregular clock. Furthermore, a `0' stored in this bit speeds up the PLL's locking. 0: CLOCK2 provides the system clock 1: The PLL Multiplier provides the system clock. NOTE: Setting the CKAF_SEL bit overrides any other clock selection. Resetting the XT_DIV16 bit
WARNING: If this register is accessed with a logical instruction, such as AND or OR, some bits may not be set as expected. WARNING: If you select the CK_AF as system clock and turn off the oscillator (bits R240.2 and R242.4 at 1), and then switch back to the XT clock by resetting the R240.2 bit, you must wait for the oscillator to restart correctly (12ms). Bit 7 = EX_STP: External Stop flag This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software. 0: No External Stop condition occurred 1: External Stop condition occurred Bit 6 = WDGRES: Watchdog reset flag. This bit is read only. 0: No Watchdog reset occurred 1: Watchdog reset occurred Bit 5 = SOFTRES: Software Reset Flag. This bit is read only. 0: No software reset occurred 1: Software reset occurred (HALT instruction) Bit 4 = XTSTOP: External Stop Enable 0: External stop disabled 1: The Xtal oscillator will be stopped as soon as the CK_AF clock is present and selected, whether this is done explicitly by the user program, or as a result of WFI, if WFI_CKSEL has
75/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS (Cont'd) PLL CONFIGURATION REGISTER (PLLCONF) R246 - Read/Write Register Page: 55 Reset Value: xx00 x111
7 MX1 MX0 DX2 DX1 0 DX0
Table 13. PLL Multiplication Factors
MX1 1 0 1 0 MX0 0 0 1 1 CLOCK2 x 14 10 8 6
Bit 5:4 = MX[1:0]: PLL Multiplication Factor. Refer to Table 13 for multiplier settings. WARNING: After these bits are modified, take care that the PLL lock-in time has elapsed before setting the CSU_CKSEL bit in the CLK_FLAG register. Bit 2:0 = DX[2:0]: PLL output clock divider factor. Refer to Table 14 for divider settings.
Table 14. Divider Configuration
DX2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 DX1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 DX0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 CK PLL CLOCK/1 PLL CLOCK/2 PLL CLOCK/3 PLL CLOCK/4 PLL CLOCK/5 PLL CLOCK/6 PLL CLOCK/7 CLOCK2 (PLL OFF, Reset State)
Figure 36. RCCU General Timing User program execution Boot ROM execution
20s External Reset Filtered External Reset CLOCK2 PLL Multiplier clock Internal Reset < 4s PLL switched on by user PLL selected by user
Reset phase
INTCLK
510 x CLOCK1
PLL Lock-in time
Exit from RESET
VR02113B
76/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
6.5 OSCILLATOR CHARACTERISTICS The on-chip oscillator circuit uses an inverting gate circuit with tri-state output. Notes: It is recommended to place the quartz or crystal as close as possible to the ST9 to reduce the parasitic capacitance. At low temperature, frost and humidity might prevent a correct start-up of the oscillator. OSCOUT must not be used to drive external circuits. When the oscillator is stopped, OSCOUT goes high impedance. In Halt mode, set by means of the HALT instruction, the parallel resistor, R, is disconnected and the oscillator is disabled, forcing the internal clock, CLOCK1, to a high level, and OSCOUT to a high impedance state. To exit the HALT condition and restart the oscillator, an external RESET pulse is required, having a a minimum duration of 12ms, as illustrated in Figure 41 It should be noted that, if the Watchdog function is enabled, a HALT instruction will not disable the oscillator. This to avoid stopping the Watchdog if a HALT code is executed in error. When this occurs, the CPU will be reset when the Watchdog times out or when an external reset is applied. Table 15. Oscillator Transconductance
gm 5V Operation 3V Operation mA/V Min 0.77 0.42 Typ 1.5 0.73 Max 2.4 1.47
R
Table 16. Crystal Internal Resistance() (5V Op.)
C1 =C2 Freq. 5 Mhz 4 Mhz 3 Mhz 56pF 110 150 270 47pF 120 200 350 33pF 210 330 560 22pF 340 510 850
Table 17. Crystal Internal Resistance() (3V Op.)
C1 =C2 Freq. 5 Mhz 4 Mhz 3 Mhz 56pF 35 55 100 47pF 45 70 135 33pF 75 125 220 22pF 120 195 350
Legend: CL1, CL2: Maximum Total Capacitance on pins OSCIN and OSCOUT (the value includes the external capacitance tied to the pin CL1 and CL2 plus the parasitic capacitance of the board and of the device). Note: The tables are relative to the fundamental quartz crystal only (not ceramic resonator).
Figure 38. Internal Oscillator Schematic
HALT
Figure 37. Crystal Oscillator
CRYSTAL CLOCK
R IN
ROUT
ST9
OSCIN
OSCOUT
OSCIN
OSCOUT
Figure 39. External Clock
EXTERNAL CLOCK
CL1
CL2 OSCIN
ST9 OSCOUT NC CLOCK INPUT
1M *Recommended for oscillator stability
77/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
OSCILLATOR CHARACTERISTICS (Cont'd) CERAMIC RESONATORS Murata Electronics CERALOCK resonators have been tested with the ST90158 at 3, 3.68, 4 and 5 MHz. Some resonators have built-in capacitors (see Table 18). The test circuit is shown in Figure 40. Figure 40. Test circuit
VDD OSCIN Rp ST90158 OSCOUT VSS
CERALOCK V1 C1 C2
Rd
V2
Table 18 shows the recommended conditions at different frequencies. Table 18. Obtained Results
Freq. (MHz) Parts Number C1 (PF) C2 (PF) Rp (Ohm) Rd (Ohm)
3 3.68
4
5
CSA3.00MG CST3.00MGW CSA3.68MG CST3.68MGW CSTCC3.68MG CSA4.00MG CST4.00MGW CSTCC4.00MG CSA5.00MG CST5.00MGW CSTCC5.00MG
30 (30) 30 (30) (15) 30 (30) (15) 30 (30) (15)
30 (30) 30 (30) (15) 30 (30) (15) 30 (30) (15)
Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Open
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Advantages of using ceramic resonators: CST and CSTCC types have built-in loading capacitors (those with values shown in parentheses ()). Rp is always open in the previous table because there is no need for a parallel resistor with a resonator (it is needed only with a crystal).
Test conditions: The evaluation conditions are 2.7 to 5.5 V for the supply voltage and -40 to 85 C for the temperature range. Caution: The above circuit condition is for design reference only. Recommended C1, C2 value depends on the circuit board used.
78/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
6.6 RESET/STOP MANAGER The Reset/Stop Manager resets the MCU when TRES or the WDGRES bits respectively; a hardone of the three following events occurs: ware initiated reset will leave both these bits reset. - A Hardware reset, initiated by a low level on the The hardware reset overrides all other conditions RESET pin. and forces the ST9 to the reset state. During Reset, the internal registers are set to their reset val- A Software reset, initiated by a HALT instruction ues, where these are defined, and the I/O pins are (when enabled). set to the Bidirectional Weak Pull-up mode. - A Watchdog end of count condition. Reset is asynchronous: as soon as the RESET pin The event which caused the last Reset is flagged is driven low, a Reset cycle is initiated. in the CLK_FLAG register, by setting the SOFFigure 41. Oscillator Start-up Sequence and Reset Timing
VDD MAX VDD MIN
OSCIN OSCOUT
12ms (5V), 24ms (3V)
INTCLK
RESET PIN
VR02085A
79/190
9
ST90158 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
RESET/STOP MANAGER (Cont'd) The on-chip Timer/Watchdog generates a reset condition if the Watchdog mode is enabled (WCR.WDEN cleared, R252 page 0), and if the programmed period elapses without the specific code (AAh, 55h) written to the appropriate register. The input pin RESET is not driven low by the onchip reset generated by the Timer/Watchdog. When the RESET pin goes high again, 510 oscillator clock cycles (CLOCK1) are counted before exiting the Reset state (+-1 CLOCK1 period, depending on the delay between the rising edge of the RESET pin and the first rising edge of CLOCK1). Subsequently a short Boot routine is executed from the device internal Boot ROM, and control then passes to the user program. The Boot routine sets the device characteristics and loads the correct values in the Memory Management Unit's pointer registers, so that these point to the physical memory areas as mapped in the specific device. The precise duration of this short Boot routine varies from device to device, depending on the Boot ROM contents.
At the end of the Boot routine the Program Counter will be set to the location specified in the Reset Vector located in the lowest two bytes of memory. 6.6.1 RESET Pin Timing To improve the noise immunity of the device, the RESET pin has a Schmitt trigger input circuit with hysteresis. In addition, a filter will prevent an unwanted reset in case of a single glitch of less than 50 ns on the RESET pin. The device is certain to reset if a negative pulse of more than 20s is applied. When the RESET pin goes high again, a delay of up to 4s will elapse before the RCCU detects this rising front. From this event on, 510 oscillator clock cycles (CLOCK1) are counted before exiting the Reset state (+-1CLOCK1 period depending on the delay between the positive edge the RCCU detects and the first rising edge of CLOCK1) If the ST9 is a ROMLESS version, without on-chip program memory, the mermory interface ports are set to external memory mode (i.e Alternate Function) and the memory accesses are made to external Program memory with wait cycles insertion.
Figure 42. Recommended Signal to be Applied on RESET Pin
VRESET VDD 0.7 VDD 0.3 VDD
20 s Minimum
6.7 EXTERNAL STOP MODE On ST9 devices provided with an external STOP pin, the Reset/Stop Manager can also stop all oscillators without resetting the device. To enter Stop Mode, the STOP pin must be forced to "0" for a minimum of 4 system clock cycles; while the STOP pin is kept at "0", the MCU will remain in Stop Mode and all context information will be preserved. During this condition the internal clock will be frozen in the high state. When the pin is forced back to "1", the MCU resumes execution of the user program after a delay of 255 CLOCK2 periods. On exiting from Stop mode an interrupt is generated and the EX_STP bit in CLK_FLAG will be set, to indicate to the user program that the machine is exiting from Stop mode.
80/190
9
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
7 EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
7.1 INTRODUCTION The ST9 External Memory Interface uses two registers (EMR1 and EMR2) to configure external memory accesses. Some interface signals are also affected by WCR - R252 Page 0. If the two registers EMR1 and EMR2 are set to the proper values, the ST9+ memory access cycle is similar to that of the original ST9, with the only exception that it is composed of just two system clock phases, named T1 and T2. During phase T1, the memory address is output on the AS falling edge and is valid on the rising edge of AS. Port0 and Port 1 maintain the address stable until the following T1 phase. Figure 43. Page 21 Registers
n
During phase T2, two forms of behavior are possible. If the memory access is a Read cycle, Port 0 pins are released in high-impedance until the next T1 phase and the data signals are sampled by the ST9 on the rising edge of DS. If the memory access is a Write cycle, on the falling edge of DS, Port 0 outputs data to be written in the external memory. Those data signals are valid on the rising edge of DS and are maintained stable until the next address is output. Note that DS is pulled low at the beginning of phase T2 only during an external memory access.
Page 21 FFh FEh FDh FCh FBh FAh F9h F8h F7h F6h F5h F4h F3h F2h F1h F0h EMR2 EMR1 CSR DPR3 DPR2 DPR1 DPR0 DMASR ISR R255 R254 R253 R252 R251 R250 R249 R248 R247 R246 R245 R244 R243 R242 R241 R240 MMU Bit DPRREM=0 Bit DPRREM=1 EXT.MEM MMU SSPL SSPH USPL USPH MODER PPR RP1 RP0 FLAGR CICR P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 SSPL SSPH USPL USPH MODER PPR RP1 RP0 FLAGR CICR P5 P4 DPR3 DPR2 DPR1 DPR0
Relocation of P[3:0] and DPR[3:0] Registers
DMASR ISR EMR2 EMR1 CSR DPR3 DPR2 DPR1 DPR0
DMASR ISR EMR2 EMR1 CSR P3 P2 P1 P0
81/190
9
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
7.2 EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS The access to external memory is made using the AS, DS, DS2, RW, Port 0, Port1, and WAIT signals described below. Refer to Figure 45 7.2.1 AS: Address Strobe AS (Output, Active low, Tristate) is active during the System Clock high-level phase of each T1 memory cycle: an AS rising edge indicates that Memory Address and Read/Write Memory control signals are valid. AS is released in high-impedance during the bus acknowledge cycle or under the processor control by setting the HIMP bit (MODER.0, R235). Depending on the device AS is available as Alternate Function or as a dedicated pin. Under Reset, AS is held high with an internal weak pull-up. The behavior of this signal is affected by the MC, ASAF, ETO, BSZ, LAS[1:0] and UAS[1:0] bits in the EMR1 or EMR2 registers. Refer to the Register description. 7.2.2 DS: Data Strobe DS (Output,Active low, Tristate) is active during the internal clock high-level phase of each T2 memory cycle. During an external memory read cycle, the data on Port 0 must be valid before the DS rising edge. During an external memory write cycle, the data on Port 0 are output on the falling edge of DS and they are valid on the rising edge of DS. When the internal memory is accessed DS is kept high during the whole memory cycle. DS is released in high-impedance during bus acknowledge cycle or under processor control by setting the HIMP bit (MODER.0, R235). Under Reset status, DS is held high with an internal weak pull-up. The behavior of this signal is affected by the MC, DS2EN, and BSZ bits in the EMR1 register. Refer to the Register description. 7.2.3 DS2: Data Strobe 2 This additional Data Strobe pin (Alternate Function Output, Active low, Tristate) is available on some ST9 devices only. It allows two external memories to be connected to the ST9, the upper memory block (A21=1 typically RAM) and the lower memory block (A21=0 typically ROM) without any external logic. The selection between the upper and lower memory blocks depends on the A21 address pin value. The upper memory block is controlled by the DS pin while the lower memory block is controlled by the DS2 pin. When the internal memory is addressed, DS2 is kept high during the whole memory cycle. DS2 is released in high-impedance during bus acknowledge cycle or under processor control by setting the HIMP bit (MODER.0, R235). DS2 is enabled via software as the Alternate Function output of the associated I/O port bit (refer to specific ST9 version to identify the specific port and pin). The behavior of this signal is affected by the DS2EN, and BSZ bits in the EMR1 register. Refer to the Register description.
82/190
9
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont'd) Figure 44. Effects of DS2EN on the behavior of DS and DS2
n
T1 SYSTEM CLOCK AS (MC=0)
NO WAIT CYCLE T2
T1
1 DS WAIT CYCLE T2
DS STRETCH
DS2EN=0 OR (DS2EN=1 AND UPPER MEMORY ADDRESSED):
DS (MC=0) DS (MC=1, READ) DS (MC=1, WRITE) DS2 DS2EN=1 AND LOWER MEMORY ADDRESSED:
DS DS2 (MC=0) DS2 (MC=1, READ) DS2 (MC=1, WRITE)
83/190
9
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont'd) Figure 45. External memory Read/Write with a programmable wait
n
NO WAIT CYCLE T1 T2
1 AS WAIT CYCLE T1 TWA
1 DS WAIT CYCLE T2 TWD
SYSTEM CLOCK
AS STRETCH
DS STRETCH
AS (MC=0)
TAVQV ALWAYS
ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS DATA IN ADDRESS DATA IN ADDRESS DATA OUT ADDRESS DATA
ALE (MC=1)
P1
DS (MC=0)
P0 MULTIPLEXED
RW (MC=0)
DS (MC=1)
RW (MC=1)
P0 MULTIPLEXED
TAVWH WRITE
RW (MC=0)
DS (MC=1)
TAVWL
RW (MC=1)
84/190
9
READ
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont'd) 7.2.4 RW: Read/Write RW (Alternate Function Output, Active low, Tristate) identifies the type of memory cycle: RW="1" identifies a memory read cycle, RW="0" identifies a memory write cycle. It is defined at the beginning of each memory cycle and it remains stable until the following memory cycle. RW is released in high-impedance during bus acknowledge cycle or under processor control by setting the HIMP bit (MODER). RW is enabled via software as the Alternate Function output of the associated I/O port bit (refer to specific ST9 device to identify the port and pin). Under Reset status, the associated bit of the port is set into bidirectional weak pull-up mode.
n n n
The behavior of this signal is affected by the MC, ETO and BSZ bits in the EMR1 register. Refer to the Register description. 7.2.5 BREQ, BACK: Bus Request, Bus Acknowledge Note: These pins are available only on some ST9 devices (see Pin description). BREQ (Alternate Function Input, Active low) indicates to the ST9 that a bus request has tried or is trying to gain control of the memory bus. Once enabled by setting the BRQEN bit (MODER.1, R235), BREQ is sampled with the falling edge of the processor internal clock during phase T2.
Figure 46. External memory Read/Write sequence with external wait (WAIT pin)
T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2
WAI T SYST EM CLOCK P1 AS (MC=0) ALE (MC=1) DS (MC=0)
MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS
P0 RW (MC=0) DS (MC=1) RW (MC=1)
MULTIPLEXED
ADD.
D.IN
ADDRESS
D.IN
ADD.
D.IN
P0 RW (MC=0) DS (MC=1)
ADD.
D.OUT
ADDRESS
D.OUT
ADD.
DATA OUT
RW (MC=1)
85/190
9
WRITE
READ
ALWAYS
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont'd) Whenever it is sampled low, the System Clock is stretched and the external memory signals (AS, DS, DS2, RW, P0 and P1) are released in high-impedance. The external memory interface pins are driven again by the ST9 as soon as BREQ is sampled high. BACK (Alternate Function Output, Active low) indicates that the ST9 has relinquished control of the memory bus in response to a bus request. BREQ is driven low when the external memory interface signals are released in high-impedance. At MCU reset, the bus request function is disabled. To enable it, configure the I/O port pins assigned to BREQ and BACK as Alternate Function and set the BRQEN bit in the MODER register. 7.2.6 PORT 0 If Port 0 (Input/Output, Push-Pull/Open-Drain/ Weak Pull-up) is used as a bit programmable parallel I/O port, it has the same features as a regular port. When set as an Alternate Function, it is used as the External Memory interface: it outputs the multiplexed Address 8 LSB: A[7:0] /Data bus D[7:0]. 7.2.7 PORT 1 If Port 1 (Input/Output, Push-Pull/Open-Drain/ Weak Pull-up) is used as a bit programmable parallel I/O port, it has the same features as a regular port. When set as an Alternate Function, it is used Figure 47. Application Example
as the external memory interface to provide the 8 MSB of the address A[15:8]. The behavior of the Port 0 and 1 pins is affected by the BSZ and ETO bits in the EMR1 register. Refer to the Register description. 7.2.8 WAIT: External Memory Wait WAIT (Alternate Function Input, Active low) indicates to the ST9 that the external memory requires more time to complete the memory access cycle. If bit EWEN (EIVR) is set, the WAIT signal is sampled with the rising edge of the processor internal clock during phase T1 or T2 of every memory cycle. If the signal was sampled active, one more internal clock cycle is added to the memory cycle. On the rising edge of the added internal clock cycle, WAIT is sampled again to continue or finish the memory cycle stretching. Note that if WAIT is sampled active during phase T1 then AS is stretched, while if WAIT is sampled active during phase T2 then DS is stretched. WAIT is enabled via software as the Alternate Function input of the associated I/O port bit (refer to specific ST9 version to identify the specific port and pin). Under Reset status, the associated bit of the port is set to the bidirectional weak pull-up mode. Refer to Figure 46
RAM 64 Kbytes RW DS P0 ST9+ AS A0-A7/D0-D7 D1-D8 Q1-Q8 LE OE LATCH P1 A15-A8 A0-A15 E W G Q0-Q7
86/190
9
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
7.3 REGISTER DESCRIPTION EXTERNAL MEMORY REGISTER 1 (EMR1) R245 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: 1000 0000 (80h)
7 x MC DS2EN ASAF x ETO BSZ 0 X
Bit 4 = ASAF: Address Strobe as Alternate Function. Depending on the device, AS can be either a dedicated pin or a port Alternate Function. This bit is used only in the second case. 0: AS Alternate function disabled. 1: AS Alternate Function enabled. Bit 2 = ETO: External toggle. 0: The external memory interface pins (AS, DS, DS2, RW, Port0, Port1) toggle only if an access to external memory is performed. 1: When the internal memory protection is disabled (mask option available on some devices only), the above pins (except DS and DS2 which never toggle during internal memory accesses) toggle during both internal and external memory accesses. Bit 1 = BSZ: Bus size. 0: All the I/O ports including the external memory interface pins use smaller, less noisy output buffers. This may limit the operation frequency of the device, unless the clock is slow enough or sufficient wait states are inserted. 1: All the I/O ports including the external memory interface pins (AS, DS, DS2, R/W, Port 0, 1) use larger, more noisy output buffers . Bit 0 = Reserved.
Bit 7 = Reserved. Bit 6 = MC: Mode Control. 0: AS, DS and RW pins keep the ST9OLD meaning. 1: AS pin becomes ALE, Address Load Enable (AS inverted); Thus Memory Adress, Read/ Write signals are valid whenever a falling edge of ALE occurs. DS becomes OEN, Output ENable: it keeps the ST9OLD meaning during external read operations, but is forced to "1" during external write operations. RW pin becomes WEN, Write ENable: it follows the ST9OLD DS meaning during external write operations, but is forced to "1" during external read operations. Bit 5 = DS2EN: Data Strobe 2 enable. 0: The DS2 pin is forced to "1" during the whole memory cycle. 1: If the lower memory block is addressed, the DS2 pin follows the ST9OLD DS meaning (if MC=0) or it becomes OEN (if MC=1). The DS pin is forced to 1 during the whole memory cycle. If the upper memory block is used, DS2 is forced to "1" during the whole memory cycle. The DS pin behaviour is not modified. Refer to Figure 44
WARNING: External memory must be correctly addressed before and after a write operation on the EMR1 register. For example, if code is fetched from external memory using the ST9OLD external memory interface configuration (MC=0), setting the MC bit will cause the device to behave unpredictably.
87/190
9
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont'd) EXTERNAL MEMORY REGISTER 2 (EMR2) R246 - Read/Write Register Page: 21 Reset value: 0000 1111 (0Fh)
7 ENCSR DPRREM MEM SEL LAS1 LAS0 0 UAS1 UAS0
the contents of ISR. In this case, iret will also restore CSR from the stack. This approach allows interrupt service routines to access the entire 4Mbytes of address space; the drawback is that the interrupt response time is slightly increased, because of the need to also save CSR on the stack. Full compatibility with the original ST9 is lost in this case, because the interrupt stack frame is different; this difference, however, should not affect the vast majority of programs. Bit 5 = DPRREM: Data Page Registers remapping 0: The locations of the four MMU (Memory Management Unit) Data Page Registers (DPR0, DPR1, DPR2 and DPR3) are in page 21. 1: The four MMU Data Page Registers are swapped with that of the Data Registers of ports 0-3. Refer to Figure 43 Bit 4 = MEMSEL: Memory Selection. Warning: Must be set by the user when using the external memory interface (Reset value is 0). Bit 3:2 = LAS[1:0]: Lower memory address strobe stretch. These two bits contain the number of wait cycles (from 0 to 3) to add to the System Clock to stretch AS during external lower memory block accesses (MSB of 22-bit internal address=0). The reset value is 3.
Bit 7 = Reserved. Bit 6 = ENCSR: Enable Code Segment Register. This bit affects the ST9 CPU behavior whenever an interrupt request is issued. 0: The CPU works in original ST9 compatibility mode concerning stack frame during interrupts. For the duration of the interrupt service routine, ISR is used instead of CSR, and the interrupt stack frame is identical to that of the original ST9: only the PC and Flags are pushed. This avoids saving the CSR on the stack in the event of an interrupt, thus ensuring a faster interrupt response time. The drawback is that it is not possible for an interrupt service routine to perform inter-segment calls or jumps: these instructions would update the CSR, which, in this case, is not used (ISR is used instead). The code segment size for all interrupt service routines is thus limited to 64K bytes. 1: If ENCSR is set, ISR is only used to point to the interrupt vector table and to initialize the CSR at the beginning of the interrupt service routine: the old CSR is pushed onto the stack together with the PC and flags, and CSR is then loaded with
88/190
9
ST90158 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont'd) Bit 1:0 = UAS[1:0]: Upper memory address strobe stretch. These two bits contain the number of wait cycles (from 0 to 3) to add to the System Clock to stretch AS during external upper memory block accesses (MSB of 22-bit internal address=1). The reset value is 3. WARNING: The EMR2 register cannot be written during an interrupt service routine. WAIT CONTROL REGISTER (WCR) R252 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset Value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)
7
0 WDGEN UDS2 UDS1 UDS0 LDS2 LDS1
tional wait cycles. UDS = 7 adds the maximum 7 INTCLK cycles (reset condition). Bit 2:0 = LDS[2:0]: Lower memory data strobe stretch. These bits contain the number of INTCLK cycles to be added automatically to DS or DS2 (depending on the DS2EN bit of the EMR1 register) for external lower memory block accesses. LDS = 0 adds no additional wait cycles, LDS = 7 adds the maximum 7 INTCLK cycles (reset condition). Note 1: The number of clock cycles added refers to INTCLK and NOT to CPUCLK. Note 2: The distinction between the Upper memory block and the Lower memory block allows different wait cycles between the first 2 Mbytes and the second 2 Mbytes, and allows 2 different data strobe signals to be used to access 2 different memories. Typically, the RAM will be located above address 0x200000 and the ROM below address 0x1FFFFF, with different access times. No extra hardware is required as DS is used to access the upper memory block and DS2 is used to access the lower memory block.
0
LDS0
Bit 7 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 6 = WDGEN: Watchdog Enable. For a description of this bit, refer to the Timer/ Watchdog chapter. WARNING: Clearing this bit has the effect of setting the Timer/Watchdog to Watchdog mode. Unless this is desired, it must be set to "1". Bit 5:3 = UDS[2:0]: Upper memory data strobe stretch. These bits contain the number of INTCLK cycles to be added automatically to DS for external upper memory block accesses. UDS = 0 adds no addi-
WARNING: The reset value of the Wait Control Register gives the maximum number of Wait cycles for external memory. To get optimum performance from the ST9, the user should write the UDS[2:0] and LDS[2:0] bits to 0, if the external addressed memories are fast enough.
89/190
9
ST90158 - I/O PORTS
8 I/O PORTS
8.1 INTRODUCTION ST9 devices feature flexible individually programmable multifunctional input/output lines. Refer to the Pin Description Chapter for specific pin allocations. These lines, which are logically grouped as 8-bit ports, can be individually programmed to provide digital input/output and analog input, or to connect input/output signals to the on-chip peripherals as alternate pin functions. All ports can be individually configured as an input, bi-directional, output or alternate function. In addition, pull-ups can be turned off for open-drain operation, and weak pull-ups can be turned on in their place, to avoid the need for off-chip resistive pull-ups. Ports configured as open drain must never have voltage on the port pin exceeding VDD (refer to the Electrical Characteristics section). Input buffers can be either TTL or CMOS compatible. Alternatively some input buffers can be permanently forced by hardware to operate as Schmitt triggers. Figure 48. I/O Register Map
GROUP E FFh FEh FDh FCh FBh FAh F9h F8h F7h F6h F5h F4h F3h F2h F1h F0h GROUP F PAGE 2 Reserved P3C2 P3C1 P3C0 Reserved P2C2 P2C1 P2C0 Reserved P1C2 P1C1 P1C0 Reserved P0C2 P0C1 P0C0 GROUP F PAGE 3 P7DR P7C2 P7C1 P7C0 P6DR P6C2 P6C1 P6C0 Reserved P5C2 P5C1 P5C0 Reserved P4C2 P4C1 P4C0 GROUP F PAGE 43 P9DR P9C2 P9C1 P9C0 P8DR P8C2 P8C1 P8C0
8.2 SPECIFIC PORT CONFIGURATIONS Refer to the Pin Description chapter for a list of the specific port styles and reset values. 8.3 PORT CONTROL REGISTERS Each port is associated with a Data register (PxDR) and three Control registers (PxC0, PxC1, PxC2). These define the port configuration and allow dynamic configuration changes during program execution. Port Data and Control registers are mapped into the Register File as shown in Figure 48. Port Data and Control registers are treated just like any other general purpose register. There are no special instructions for port manipulation: any instruction that can address a register, can address the ports. Data can be directly accessed in the port register, without passing through other memory or "accumulator" locations.
System Registers
E5h E4h E3h E2h E1h E0h
P5DR P4DR P3DR P2DR P1DR P0DR
R229 R228 R227 R226 R225 R224
Reserved
R255 R254 R253 R252 R251 R250 R249 R248 R247 R246 R245 R244 R243 R242 R241 R240
90/190
9
ST90158 - I/O PORTS
PORT CONTROL REGISTERS (Cont'd) During Reset, ports with weak pull-ups are set in bidirectional/weak pull-up mode and the output Data Register is set to FFh. This condition is also held after Reset, except for Ports 0 and 1 in ROMless devices, and can be redefined under software control. Bidirectional ports without weak pull-ups are set in high impedance during reset. To ensure proper levels during reset, these ports must be externally connected to either VDD or VSS through external pull-up or pull-down resistors. Other reset conditions may apply in specific ST9 devices. 8.4 INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION By programming the control bits PxC0.n and PxC1.n (see Figure 49) it is possible to configure bit Px.n as Input, Output, Bidirectional or Alternate Function Output, where X is the number of the I/O port, and n the bit within the port (n = 0 to 7). When programmed as input, it is possible to select the input level as TTL or CMOS compatible by programming the relevant PxC2.n control bit, except where the Schmitt trigger option is assigned to the pin. The output buffer can be programmed as pushpull or open-drain. A weak pull-up configuration can be used to avoid external pull-ups when programmed as bidirectional (except where the weak pull-up option has been permanently disabled in the pin hardware assignment).
Each pin of an I/O port may assume software programmable Alternate Functions (refer to the device Pin Description and to Section 8.5 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ARCHITECTURE). To output signals from the ST9 peripherals, the port must be configured as AF OUT. On ST9 devices with A/D Converter(s), configure the ports used for analog inputs as AF IN. The basic structure of the bit Px.n of a general purpose port Px is shown in Figure 50. Independently of the chosen configuration, when the user addresses the port as the destination register of an instruction, the port is written to and the data is transferred from the internal Data Bus to the Output Master Latches. When the port is addressed as the source register of an instruction, the port is read and the data (stored in the Input Latch) is transferred to the internal Data Bus. When Px.n is programmed as an Input: (See Figure 51). - The Output Buffer is forced tristate. - The data present on the I/O pin is sampled into the Input Latch at the beginning of each instruction execution. - The data stored in the Output Master Latch is copied into the Output Slave Latch at the end of the execution of each instruction. Thus, if bit Px.n is reconfigured as an Output or Bidirectional, the data stored in the Output Slave Latch will be reflected on the I/O pin.
91/190
9
ST90158 - I/O PORTS
INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION (Cont'd) Figure 49. Control Bits
Bit 7 PxC2 PxC27 Bit n PxC2n Bit 0 PxC20
PxC1
PxC17
PxC1n
PxC10
PxC0
n
PxC07
PxC0n
PxC00
Table 19. Port Bit Configuration Table (n = 0, 1... 7; X = port number)
General Purpose I/O Pins PXC2n PXC1n PXC0n PXn Configuration PXn Output Type PXn Input Type 0 0 0 BID WP OD TTL
(or Schmitt Trigger)
A/D Pins 1 0 1 IN HI-Z TTL 0 1 1 AF OUT PP TTL
(or Schmitt Trigger)
1 0 0 BID OD TTL
(or Schmitt Tr igger)
0 1 0 OUT PP TTL
(or Schmitt Tri gger)
1 1 0 OUT OD TTL
(or Schmitt Trigger)
0 0 1 IN HI-Z CMOS
(or Schmitt Tr igger)
1 1 1 AF OUT OD TTL
(or Schmitt Trigger)
1 1 1 AF IN HI-Z(1) Analog Input
(or Schmitt Trigger)
(1)
For A/D Converter inputs. Port Bit Alternate Function Bidirectional CMOS Standard Input Levels High Impedance Input Open Drain Output Push-Pull TTL Standard Input Levels Weak Pull-up
Legend:
X = n = AF = BID = CMOS= HI-Z = IN = OD = OUT = PP = TTL = WP =
92/190
9
ST90158 - I/O PORTS
INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION (Cont'd) Figure 50. Basic Structure of an I/O Port Pin
I/O PIN
PUSH-PULL TRISTATE OPEN DRAIN WEAK PULL-UP
TTL / CMOS (or Schmitt Trigger)
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH FROM PERIPHERAL OUTPUT ALTERNATE FUNCTION INPUT OUTPUT BIDIRECTIONAL OUTPUT
TO PERIPHERAL INPUTS AND INTERRUPTS INPUT BIDIRECTIONAL ALTERNATE FUNCTION INPUT LATCH
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
Figure 51. Input Configuration
I/O PIN
Figure 52. Output Configuration
I/O PIN
TRISTATE
TTL / CMOS (or Schmitt Trigger) TO PERIPHERAL INPUTS AND INTERRUPTS
OPEN DRAIN PUSH-PULL
TTL (or Schmitt Trigger) TO PERIPHERAL INPUTS AND INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INPUT LATCH
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
n n n
INTERNAL DATA BUS
93/190
9
ST90158 - I/O PORTS
INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION (Cont'd) When Px.n is programmed as an Output: (Figure 52) - The Output Buffer is turned on in an Open-drain or Push-pull configuration. - The data stored in the Output Master Latch is copied both into the Input Latch and into the Output Slave Latch, driving the I/O pin, at the end of the execution of the instruction. When Px.n is programmed as Bidirectional: (Figure 53) - The Output Buffer is turned on in an Open-Drain or Weak Pull-up configuration (except when disabled in hardware). - The data present on the I/O pin is sampled into the Input Latch at the beginning of the execution of the instruction. - The data stored in the Output Master Latch is copied into the Output Slave Latch, driving the I/ O pin, at the end of the execution of the instruction. WARNING: Due to the fact that in bidirectional mode the external pin is read instead of the output latch, particular care must be taken with arithmetic/logic and Boolean instructions performed on a bidirectional port pin. These instructions use a read-modify-write sequence, and the result written in the port register depends on the logical level present on the external pin. This may bring unwanted modifications to the port output register content. For example: Port register content, 0Fh external port value, 03h (Bits 3 and 2 are externally forced to 0) A bset instruction on bit 7 will return: Port register content, 83h external port value, 83h (Bits 3 and 2 have been cleared). To avoid this situation, it is suggested that all operations on a port, using at least one bit in bidirectional mode, are performed on a copy of the port register, then transferring the result with a load instruction to the I/O port. When Px.n is programmed as a digital Alternate Function Output: (Figure 54) - The Output Buffer is turned on in an Open-Drain or Push-Pull configuration.
- The data present on the I/O pin is sampled into the Input Latch at the beginning of the execution of the instruction. - The signal from an on-chip function is allowed to load the Output Slave Latch driving the I/O pin. Signal timing is under control of the alternate function. If no alternate function is connected to Px.n, the I/O pin is driven to a high level when in Push-Pull configuration, and to a high impedance state when in open drain configuration. Figure 53. Bidirectional Configuration
I/O PIN
WEAK PULL-UP OPEN DRAIN
TTL (or Schmitt Trigger) TO PERIPHERAL INPUTS AND INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
n n
Figure 54. Alternate Function Configuration
I/O PIN
OPEN DRAIN PUSH-PULL
TTL (or Schmitt Trigger) TO PERIPHERAL INPUTS AND INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
FROM PERIPHERAL OUTPUT INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
n n n n n n
94/190
9
ST90158 - I/O PORTS
8.5 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ARCHITECTURE Each I/O pin may be connected to three different types of internal signal: - Data bus Input/Output - Alternate Function Input - Alternate Function Output 8.5.1 Pin Declared as I/O A pin declared as I/O, is connected to the I/O buffer. This pin may be an Input, an Output, or a bidirectional I/O, depending on the value stored in (PxC2, PxC1 and PxC0). 8.5.2 Pin Declared as an Alternate Input A single pin may be directly connected to several Alternate inputs. In this case, the user must select the required input mode (with the PxC2, PxC1, PxC0 bits) and enable the selected Alternate Function in the Control Register of the peripheral. No specific port configuration is required to enable an Alternate Function input, since the input buffer is directly connected to each alternate function module on the shared pin. As more than one module can use the same input, it is up to the user software to enable the required module as necessary. Parallel I/Os remain operational even when using an Alternate Function input. The exception to this is when an I/O port bit is permanently assigned by hardware as an A/D bit. In this case , after software programming of the bit in AF-OD-TTL, the Alternate function output is forced to logic level 1. The analog voltage level on the corresponding pin is directly input to the A/D. 8.5.3 Pin Declared as an Alternate Function Output The user must select the AF OUT configuration using the PxC2, PxC1, PxC0 bits. Several Alternate Function outputs may drive a common pin. In such case, the Alternate Function output signals are logically ANDed before driving the common pin. The user must therefore enable the required Alternate Function Output by software.
WARNING: When a pin is connected both to an alternate function output and to an alternate function input, it should be noted that the output signal will always be present on the alternate function input.
8.6 I/O STATUS AFTER WFI, HALT AND RESET The status of the I/O ports during the Wait For Interrupt, Halt and Reset operational modes is shown in the following table. The External Memory Interface ports are shown separately. If only the internal memory is being used and the ports are acting as I/O, the status is the same as shown for the other I/O ports.
Mode Ext. Mem - I/O Ports P0 P1, P2, P6 High Impedance or next address (depending on Next the last Address memory operation performed on Port) High ImpedNext ance Address I/O Ports
WFI
Not Affected (clock outputs running)
HALT
RESET
Not Affected (clock outputs stopped) Bidirectional Weak Alternate function push- Pull-up (High impull (ROMless device) pedance when disabled in hardware).
95/190
9
ST90158 - TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
9 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS
9.1 TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT) Important Note: This chapter is a generic description of the WDT peripheral. However depending on the ST9 device, some or all of WDT interface signals described may not be connected to external pins. For the list of WDT pins present on the ST9 device, refer to the device pinout description in the first section of the data sheet. 9.1.1 Introduction The Timer/Watchdog (WDT) peripheral consists of a programmable 16-bit timer and an 8-bit prescaler. It can be used, for example, to: - Generate periodic interrupts - Measure input signal pulse widths - Request an interrupt after a set number of events - Generate an output signal waveform - Act as a Watchdog timer to monitor system integrity Figure 55. Timer/Watchdog Block Diagram
INEN INMD1 INMD2 INPUT WDIN1 & CLOCK CONTROL LOGIC INTCLK/4 OUTMD WROUT OUTEN MUX WDT CLOCK WDTPR 8-BIT PRESCALER WDTRH , WDTRL 16-BIT DOWNCOU NTER END OF COUNT
The main WDT registers are: - Control register for the input, output and interrupt logic blocks (WDTCR) - 16-bit counter register pair (WDTHR, WDTLR) - Prescaler register (WDTPR) The hardware interface consists of up to five signals: - WDIN External clock input - WDOUT Square wave or PWM signal output - INT0 External interrupt input - NMI Non-Maskable Interrupt input - HW0SW1 Hardware/Software Watchdog enable.
NMI 1 INT0 1 HW0SW 11 MUX WDGEN INTERRUPT IAOS TLIS CONTROL LOGIC
OUTPUT CONTROL LOGIC
WDOUT1
RESET TOP LEVEL INTERRUPT REQUES T
1Pin
not present on some ST9 devices.
INTA0 REQUEST
96/190
9
ST90158 - TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont'd) 9.1.2 Functional Description 9.1.2.1 External Signals The HW0SW1 pin can be used to permanently enable Watchdog mode. Refer to Section 0.1.3.1. The WDIN Input pin can be used in one of four modes: - Event Counter Mode - Gated External Input Mode - Triggerable Input Mode - Retriggerable Input Mode The WDOUT output pin can be used to generate a square wave or a Pulse Width Modulated signal. An interrupt, generated when the WDT is running as the 16-bit Timer/Counter, can be used as a Top Level Interrupt or as an interrupt source connected to channel A0 of the external interrupt structure (replacing the INT0 interrupt input). The counter can be driven either by an external clock, or internally by INTCLK divided by 4. 9.1.2.2 Initialisation The prescaler (WDTPR) and counter (WDTRL, WDTRH) registers must be loaded with initial values before starting the Timer/Counter. If this is not done, counting will start with reset values. 9.1.2.3 Start/Stop The ST_SP bit enables downcounting. When this bit is set, the Timer will start at the beginning of the following instruction. Resetting this bit stops the counter. If the counter is stopped and restarted, counting will resume from the last value unless a new constant has been entered in the Timer registers (WDTRL, WDTRH). A new constant can be written in the WDTRH, WDTRL, WDTPR registers while the counter is running. The new value of the WDTRH, WDTRL registers will be loaded at the next End of Count (EOC) condition while the new value of the WDTPR register will be effective immediately. End of Count is when the counter is 0. When Watchdog mode is enabled the state of the ST_SP bit is irrelevant.
9.1.2.4 Single/Continuous Mode The S_C bit allows selection of single or continuous mode.This Mode bit can be written with the Timer stopped or running. It is possible to toggle the S_C bit and start the counter with the same instruction. Single Mode On reaching the End Of Count condition, the Timer stops, reloads the constant, and resets the Start/ Stop bit. Software can check the current status by reading this bit. To restart the Timer, set the Start/ Stop bit. Note: If the Timer constant has been modified during the stop period, it is reloaded at start time. Continuous Mode On reaching the End Of Count condition, the counter automatically reloads the constant and restarts. It is stopped only if the Start/Stop bit is reset. 9.1.2.5 Input Section If the Timer/Counter input is enabled (INEN bit) it can count pulses input on the WDIN pin. Otherwise it counts the internal clock/4. For instance, when INTCLK = 20MHz, the End Of Count rate is: 3.35 seconds for Maximum Count (Timer Const. = FFFFh, Prescaler Const. = FFh) 200 ns for Minimum Count (Timer Const. = 0000h, Prescaler Const. = 00h) The Input pin can be used in one of four modes: - Event Counter Mode - Gated External Input Mode - Triggerable Input Mode - Retriggerable Input Mode The mode is configurable in the WDTCR. 9.1.2.6 Event Counter Mode In this mode the Timer is driven by the external clock applied to the input pin, thus operating as an event counter. The event is defined as a high to low transition of the input signal. Spacing between trailing edges should be at least 8 INTCLK periods (or 400ns with INTCLK = 20MHz). Counting starts at the next input event after the ST_SP bit is set and stops when the ST_SP bit is reset.
97/190
9
ST90158 - TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont'd) 9.1.2.7 Gated Input Mode This mode can be used for pulse width measurement. The Timer is clocked by INTCLK/4, and is started and stopped by means of the input pin and the ST_SP bit. When the input pin is high, the Timer counts. When it is low, counting stops. The maximum input pin frequency is equivalent to INTCLK/8. 9.1.2.8 Triggerable Input Mode The Timer (clocked internally by INTCLK/4) is started by the following sequence: - setting the Start-Stop bit, followed by - a High to Low transition on the input pin. To stop the Timer, reset the ST_SP bit. 9.1.2.9 Retriggerable Input Mode In this mode, the Timer (clocked internally by INTCLK/4) is started by setting the ST_SP bit. A High to Low transition on the input pin causes counting to restart from the initial value. When the Timer is stopped (ST_SP bit reset), a High to Low transition of the input pin has no effect. 9.1.2.10 Timer/Counter Output Modes Output modes are selected by means of the OUTEN (Output Enable) and OUTMD (Output Mode) bits of the WDTCR register. No Output Mode (OUTEN = "0") The output is disabled and the corresponding pin is set high, in order to allow other alternate functions to use the I/O pin. Square Wave Output Mode (OUTEN = "1", OUTMD = "0") The Timer outputs a signal with a frequency equal to half the End of Count repetition rate on the WDOUT pin. With an INTCLK frequency of 20MHz, this allows a square wave signal to be generated whose period can range from 400ns to 6.7 seconds. Pulse Width Modulated Output Mode (OUTEN = "1", OUTMD = "1") The state of the WROUT bit is transferred to the output pin (WDOUT) at the End of Count, and is held until the next End of Count condition. The user can thus generate PWM signals by modifying the status of the WROUT pin between End of Count events, based on software counters decremented by the Timer Watchdog interrupt.
9.1.3 Watchdog Timer Operation This mode is used to detect the occurrence of a software fault, usually generated by external interference or by unforeseen logical conditions, which causes the application program to abandon its normal sequence of operation. The Watchdog, when enabled, resets the MCU, unless the program executes the correct write sequence before expiry of the programmed time period. The application program must be designed so as to correctly write to the WDTLR Watchdog register at regular intervals during all phases of normal operation. 9.1.3.1 Hardware Watchdog/Software Watchdog The HW0SW1 pin (when available) selects Hardware Watchdog or Software Watchdog. If HW0SW1 is held low: - The Watchdog is enabled by hardware immediately after an external reset. (Note: Software reset or Watchdog reset have no effect on the Watchdog enable status). - The initial counter value (FFFFh) cannot be modified, however software can change the prescaler value on the fly. - The WDGEN bit has no effect. (Note: it is not forced low). If HW0SW1 is held high, or is not present: - The Watchdog can be enabled by resetting the WDGEN bit. 9.1.3.2 Starting the Watchdog In Watchdog mode the Timer is clocked by INTCLK/4. If the Watchdog is software enabled, the time base must be written in the timer registers before entering Watchdog mode by resetting the WDGEN bit. Once reset, this bit cannot be changed by software. If the Watchdog is hardware enabled, the time base is fixed by the reset value of the registers. Resetting WDGEN causes the counter to start, regardless of the value of the Start-Stop bit. In Watchdog mode, only the Prescaler Constant may be modified. If the End of Count condition is reached a System Reset is generated.
98/190
9
ST90158 - TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont'd) 9.1.3.3 Preventing Watchdog System Reset In order to prevent a system reset, the sequence AAh, 55h must be written to WDTLR (Watchdog Timer Low Register). Once 55h has been written, the Timer reloads the constant and counting restarts from the preset value. To reload the counter, the two writing operations must be performed sequentially without inserting other instructions that modify the value of the WDTLR register between the writing operations. The maximum allowed time between two reloads of the counter depends on the Watchdog timeout period. Figure 56. Watchdog Timer Mode
COUNT VALUE
9.1.3.4 Non-Stop Operation In Watchdog Mode, a Halt instruction is regarded as illegal. Execution of the Halt instruction stops further execution by the CPU and interrupt acknowledgment, but does not stop INTCLK, CPUCLK or the Watchdog Timer, which will cause a System Reset when the End of Count condition is reached. Furthermore, ST_SP, S_C and the Input Mode selection bits are ignored. Hence, regardless of their status, the counter always runs in Continuous Mode, driven by the internal clock. The Output mode should not be enabled, since in this context it is meaningless.
TIMER START COUNTING
RESET
WRITEWDTRH,WDTRL WDGEN=0 WRITE AAh,55h INTOWDTRL PRODUCE COUNT RELOAD SOFTWAREFAIL (E.G. INFINITELOOP) ORPERIPHERALFAIL
VA00220
99/190
9
ST90158 - TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont'd) 9.1.4 WDT Interrupts The Timer/Watchdog issues an interrupt request at every End of Count, when this feature is enabled. A pair of control bits, IA0S (EIVR.1, Interrupt A0 selection bit) and TLIS (EIVR.2, Top Level Input Selection bit) allow the selection of 2 interrupt sources (Timer/Watchdog End of Count, or External Pin) handled in two different ways, as a Top Level Non Maskable Interrupt (Software Reset), or as a source for channel A0 of the external interrupt logic. A block diagram of the interrupt logic is given in Figure 3. Note: Software traps can be generated by setting the appropriate interrupt pending bit. Table 1 below, shows all the possible configurations of interrupt/reset sources which relate to the Timer/Watchdog. A reset caused by the watchdog will set bit 6, WDGRES of R242 - Page 55 (Clock Flag Register). See section CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS.
Figure 57. Interrupt Sources
TIMER WATC HDOG
RESET
WDGEN (WCR.6)
0 MUX INT0 1 IA0S (EIVR .1) INTA0 REQUEST
0 MUX NMI 1 TLIS (EIVR.2) VA00293 TOP LEVEL INTERRUP T REQUEST
Table 20. Interrupt Configuration
Control Bits WDGEN 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 IA0S 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 TLIS 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Reset WDG/Ext Reset WDG/Ext Reset WDG/Ext Reset WDG/Ext Reset Ext Ext Ext Ext Reset Reset Reset Reset Enabled Sources INTA0 SW TRAP SW TRAP Ext Pin Ext Pin Timer Timer Ext Pin Ext Pin Top Level SW TRAP Ext Pin SW TRAP Ext Pin Timer Ext Pin Timer Ext Pin Operating Mode Watchdog Watchdog Watchdog Watchdog Timer Timer Timer Timer
Legend: WDG = Watchdog function SW TRAP = Software Trap Note: If IA0S and TLIS = 0 (enabling the Watchdog EOC as interrupt source for both Top Level and INTA0 interrupts), only the INTA0 interrupt is taken into account.
100/190
9
ST90158 - TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont'd) 9.1.5 Register Description The Timer/Watchdog is associated with 4 registers mapped into Group F, Page 0 of the Register File. WDTHR: Timer/Watchdog High Register WDTLR: Timer/Watchdog Low Register WDTPR: Timer/Watchdog Prescaler Register WDTCR: Timer/Watchdog Control Register Three additional control bits are mapped in the following registers on Page 0: Watchdog Mode Enable, (WCR.6) Top Level Interrupt Selection, (EIVR.2) Interrupt A0 Channel Selection, (EIVR.1) Note: The registers containing these bits also contain other functions. Only the bits relevant to the operation of the Timer/Watchdog are shown here. Counter Register This 16 bit register (WDTLR, WDTHR) is used to load the 16 bit counter value. The registers can be read or written "on the fly". TIMER/WATCHDOG HIGH REGISTER (WDTHR) R248 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R9 0 R8
TIMER/WATCHDOG PRESCALER REGISTER (WDTPR) R250 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7 PR7 PR6 PR5 PR4 PR3 PR2 PR1 0 PR0
Bit 7:0 = PR[7:0] Prescaler value. A programmable value from 1 (00h) to 256 (FFh).
Warning: In order to prevent incorrect operation of the Timer/Watchdog, the prescaler (WDTPR) and counter (WDTRL, WDTRH) registers must be initialised before starting the Timer/Watchdog. If this is not done, counting will start with the reset (un-initialised) values.
WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (WDTCR) R251- Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 0001 0010 (12h)
7
ST_SP S_C INMD1 INMD2 INEN OUTMD WROUT
0
OUTEN
Bit 7:0 = R[15:8] Counter Most Significant Bits.
Bit 7 = ST_SP: Start/Stop Bit. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Stop counting 1: Start counting (see Warning above) Bit 6 = S_C: Single/Continuous. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Continuous Mode 1: Single Mode Bit 5:4 = INMD[1:2]: Input mode selection bits. These bits select the input mode:
INMD1 0 0 1 1 INMD2 0 1 0 1 INPUT MODE Event Counter Gated Input (Reset value) Triggerable Input Retriggerable Input
TIMER/WATCHDOG LOW REGISTER (WDTLR) R249 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 1111 1111b (FFh)
7 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 0 R0
Bit 7:0 = R[7:0] Counter Least Significant Bits.
101/190
9
ST90158 - TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont'd) Bit 3 = INEN: Input Enable. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable input section 1: Enable input section Bit 2 = OUTMD: Output Mode. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: The output is toggled at every End of Count 1: The value of the WROUT bit is transferred to the output pin on every End Of Count if OUTEN=1. Bit 1 = WROUT: Write Out. The status of this bit is transferred to the Output pin when OUTMD is set; it is user definable to allow PWM output (on Reset WROUT is set). Bit 0 = OUTEN: Output Enable bit. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable output 1: Enable output by the user program. At System Reset, the Watchdog mode is disabled. Note: This bit is ignored if the Hardware Watchdog option is enabled by pin HW0SW1 (if available). EXTERNAL INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (EIVR) R246 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: xxxx 0110 (x6h)
7 x x x x x TLIS IA0S 0 x
Bit 2 = TLIS: Top Level Input Selection. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Watchdog End of Count is TL interrupt source 1: NMI is TL interrupt source Bit 1 = IA0S: Interrupt Channel A0 Selection. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Watchdog End of Count is INTA0 source 1: External Interrupt pin is INTA0 source Warning: To avoid spurious interrupt requests, the IA0S bit should be accessed only when the interrupt logic is disabled (i.e. after the DI instruction). It is also necessary to clear any possible interrupt pending requests on channel A0 before enabling this interrupt channel. A delay instruction (e.g. a NOP instruction) must be inserted between the reset of the interrupt pending bit and the IA0S write instruction. Other bits are described in the Interrupt section.
WAIT CONTROL REGISTER (WCR) R252 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)
7 x WDGEN x x x x x 0 x
Bit 6 = WDGEN: Watchdog Enable (active low). Resetting this bit via software enters the Watchdog mode. Once reset, it cannot be set anymore
102/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
9.2 MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT) 9.2.1 Introduction The Multifunction Timer (MFT) peripheral offers powerful timing capabilities and features 12 operating modes, including automatic PWM generation and frequency measurement. The MFT comprises a 16-bit Up/Down counter driven by an 8-bit programmable prescaler. The input clock may be INTCLK/3 or an external source. The timer features two 16-bit Comparison Registers, and two 16-bit Capture/Load/Reload Registers. Two input pins and two alternate function output pins are available. Several functional configurations are possible, for instance: - 2 input captures on separate external lines, and 2 independent output compare functions with the counter in free-running mode, or 1 output compare at a fixed repetition rate. Figure 58. MFT Simplified Block Diagram - 1 input capture, 1 counter reload and 2 independent output compares. - 2 alternate autoreloads and 2 independent output compares. - 2 alternate captures on the same external line and 2 independent output compares at a fixed repetition rate. When two timers are present in an ST9 device, a combined operating mode is available. An internal On-Chip Event signal can be used on some devices to control other on-chip peripherals. The two external inputs may be individually programmed to detect any of the following: - rising edges - falling edges - both rising and falling edges
103/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) The configuration of each input is programmed in the Input Control Register. Each of the two output pins can be driven from any of three possible sources: - Compare Register 0 logic - Compare Register 1 logic - Overflow/Underflow logic Each of these three sources can cause one of the following four actions, independently, on each of the two outputs: - Nop, Set, Reset, Toggle In addition, an additional On-Chip Event signal can be generated by two of the three sources mentioned above, i.e. Over/Underflow event and Compare 0 event. This signal can be used internally to Figure 59. Detailed Block Diagram
synchronise another on-chip peripheral. Five maskable interrupt sources referring to an End Of Count condition, 2 input captures and 2 output compares, can generate 3 different interrupt requests (with hardware fixed priority), pointing to 3 interrupt routine vectors. Two independent DMA channels are available for rapid data transfer operations. Each DMA request (associated with a capture on the REG0R register, or with a compare on the CMP0R register) has priority over an interrupt request generated by the same source. A SWAP mode is also available to allow high speed continuous transfers (see Interrupt and DMA chapter).
104/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.2 Functional Description The MFT operating modes are selected by programming the Timer Control Register (TCR) and the Timer Mode Register (TMR). 9.2.2.1 Trigger Events A trigger event may be generated by software (by setting either the CP0 or the CP1 bits in the T_FLAGR register) or by an external source which may be programmed to respond to the rising edge, the falling edge or both by programming bits A0A1 and B0-B1 in the T_ICR register. This trigger event can be used to perform a capture or a load, depending on the Timer mode (configured using the bits in Table 24). An event on the TxINA input or setting the CP0 bit triggers a capture to, or a load from the REG0R register (except in Bicapture mode, see Section 9.2.2.11). An event on the TxINB input or setting the CP1 bit triggers a capture to, or a load from the REG1R register. In addition, in the special case of "Load from REG0R and monitor on REG1R", it is possible to use the TxINB input as a trigger for REG0R." 9.2.2.2 One Shot Mode When the counter generates an overflow (in upcount mode), or an underflow (in down-count mode), that is to say when an End Of Count condition is reached, the counter stops and no counter reload occurs. The counter may only be restarted by an external trigger on TxINA or B or a by software trigger on CP0 only. One Shot Mode is entered by setting the CO bit in TMR. 9.2.2.3 Continuous Mode Whenever the counter reaches an End Of Count condition, the counting sequence is automatically restarted and the counter is reloaded from REG0R (or from REG1R, when selected in Biload Mode). Continuous Mode is entered by resetting the C0 bit in TMR. 9.2.2.4 Triggered And Retriggered Modes A triggered event may be generated by software (by setting either the CP0 or the CP1 bit in the
T_FLAGR register), or by an external source which may be programmed to respond to the rising edge, the falling edge or both, by programming bits A0-A1 and B0-B1 in T_ICR. In One Shot and Triggered Mode, every trigger event arriving before an End Of Count, is masked. In One Shot and Retriggered Mode, every trigger received while the counter is running, automatically reloads the counter from REG0R. Triggered/Retriggered Mode is set by the REN bit in TMR. The TxINA input refers to REG0R and the TxINB input refers to REG1R. WARNING. If the Triggered Mode is selected when the counter is in Continuous Mode, every trigger is disabled, it is not therefore possible to synchronise the counting cycle by hardware or software. 9.2.2.5 Gated Mode In this mode, counting takes place only when the external gate input is at a logic low level. The selection of TxINA or TxINB as the gate input is made by programming the IN0-IN3 bits in T_ICR. 9.2.2.6 Capture Mode The REG0R and REG1R registers may be independently set in Capture Mode by setting RM0 or RM1 in TMR, so that a capture of the current count value can be performed either on REG0R or on REG1R, initiated by software (by setting CP0 or CP1 in the T_FLAGR register) or by an event on the external input pins. WARNING. Care should be taken when two software captures are to be performed on the same register. In this case, at least one instruction must be present between the first CP0/CP1 bit set and the subsequent CP0/CP1 bit reset instructions. 9.2.2.7 Up/Down Mode The counter can count up or down depending on the state of the UDC bit (Up/Down Count) in TCR, or on the configuration of the external input pins, which have priority over UDC (see Input pin assignment in T_ICR). The UDCS bit returns the counter up/down current status (see also the Up/ Down Autodiscrimination mode in the Input Pin Assignment Section).
105/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.2.8 Free Running Mode The timer counts continuously (in up or down mode) and the counter value simply overflows or underflows through FFFFh or zero; there is no End Of Count condition as such, and no reloading takes place. This mode is automatically selected either in Bicapture Mode or by setting REG0R for a capture function (Continuous Mode must also be set). In Autoclear Mode, free running operation can be had, with the possibility of choosing a maximum count value before overflow or underflow which is less than 216 (see Autoclear Mode). 9.2.2.9 Monitor Mode When the RM1 bit in TMR is reset, and the timer is not in Bivalue Mode, REG1R acts as a monitor, duplicating the current up or down counter contents, thus allowing the counter to be read "on the fly". 9.2.2.10 Autoclear Mode A clear command forces the counter either to 0000h or to FFFFh, depending on whether upcounting or downcounting is selected. The counter reset may be obtained either directly, through the CCL bit in TCR, or by entering the Autoclear Mode, through the CCP0 and CCMP0 bits in TCR. Every capture performed on REG0R (if CCP0 is set), or every successful compare performed by CMP0R (if CCMP0 is set), clears the counter and reloads the prescaler.
The Clear On Capture mode allows direct measurement of delta time between successive captures on REG0R, while the Clear On Compare mode allows free running with the possibility of choosing a maximum count value before overflow or underflow which is less than 216 (see Free Running Mode). 9.2.2.11 Bivalue Mode Depending on the value of the RM0 bit in TMR, the Biload Mode (RM0 reset) or the Bicapture Mode (RM0 set) can be selected as illustrated in Figure 21 below: Table 21. Bivalue Modes
RM0 0 1 TMR bits RM1 X X BM 1 1 Timer Operating Modes BiLoad mode BiCapture Mode
A) Biload Mode The Biload Mode is entered by selecting the Bivalue Mode (BM set in TMR) and programming REG0R as a reload register (RM0 reset in TMR). At any End Of Count, counter reloading is performed alternately from REG0R and REG1R, (a low level for BM bit always sets REG0R as the current register, so that, after a Low to High transition of BM bit, the first reload is always from REG0R).
106/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) Every software or external trigger event on REG0R performs a reload from REG0R resetting the Biload cycle. In One Shot mode (reload initiated by software or by an external trigger), reloading is always from REG0R. B) Bicapture Mode The Bicapture Mode is entered by selecting the Bivalue Mode (the BM bit in TMR is set) and by programming REG0R as a capture register (the RM0 bit in TMR is set). Every capture event, software simulated (by setting the CP0 flag) or coming directly from the TxINA input line, captures the current counter value alternately into REG0R and REG1R. When the BM bit is reset, REG0R is the current register, so that the first capture, after resetting the BM bit, is always into REG0R. 9.2.2.12 Parallel Mode When two timers are present on an ST9 device, the parallel mode is entered when the ECK bit in the TMR register of Timer 1 is set. The Timer 1 prescaler input is internally connected to the Timer 0 prescaler output. Timer 0 prescaler input is connected to the system clock line.
By loading the Prescaler Register of Timer 1 with the value 00h the two timers (Timer 0 and Timer 1) are driven by the same frequency in parallel mode. In this mode the clock frequency may be divided by a factor in the range from 1 to 216. 9.2.2.13 Autodiscriminator Mode The phase difference sign of two overlapping pulses (respectively on TxINB and TxINA) generates a one step up/down count, so that the up/down control and the counter clock are both external. The setting of the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration. Figure 60. Parallel Mode Description
INTCLK/ 3 PRESCALER 0 TIMER 0
PRESCALER 1
TIMER 1 (See note)
Note: Timer 1 is not available on all devices. Refer to the device block diagram and register map.
107/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.3 Input Pin Assignment The two external inputs (TxINA and TxINB) of the timer can be individually configured to catch a particular external event (i.e. rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) by programming the two relevant bits (A0, A1 and B0, B1) for each input in the external Input Control Register (T_ICR). The 16 different functional modes of the two external inputs can be selected by programming bits IN0 - IN3 of the T_ICR, as illustrated in Figure 22 Table 22. Input Pin Function
I C Reg. IN3-IN0 bits 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 TxINA Input Function not used not used Gate Gate not used Trigger Gate Trigger Clock Up Up/Down Trigger Up Up/Down Autodiscr. Trigger Ext. Clock Trigger TxINB Input Function not used Trigger not used Trigger Ext. Clock not used Ext. Clock Trigger Clock Down Ext. Clock Trigger Down not used Autodiscr. Ext. Clock Trigger Gate
Some choices relating to the external input pin assignment are defined in conjunction with the RM0 and RM1 bits in TMR. For input pin assignment codes which use the input pins as Trigger Inputs (except for code 1010, Trigger Up:Trigger Down), the following conditions apply:
- a trigger signal on the TxINA input pin performs an U/D counter load if RM0 is reset, or an external capture if RM0 is set. - a trigger signal on the TxINB input pin always performs an external capture on REG1R. The TxINB input pin is disabled when the Bivalue Mode is set. Note: For proper operation of the External Input pins, the following must be observed: - the minimum external clock/trigger pulse width must not be less than the system clock (INTCLK) period if the input pin is programmed as rising or falling edge sensitive. - the minimum external clock/trigger pulse width must not be less than the prescaler clock period (INTCLK/3) if the input pin is programmed as rising and falling edge sensitive (valid also in Auto discrimination mode). - the minimum delay between two clock/trigger pulse active edges must be greater than the prescaler clock period (INTCLK/3), while the minimum delay between two consecutive clock/ trigger pulses must be greater than the system clock (INTCLK) period. - the minimum gate pulse width must be at least twice the prescaler clock period (INTCLK/3). - in Autodiscrimination mode, the minimum delay between the input pin A pulse edge and the edge of the input pin B pulse, must be at least equal to the system clock (INTCLK) period. - if a number, N, of external pulses must be counted using a Compare Register in External Clock mode, then the Compare Register must be loaded with the value [X +/- (N-1)], where X is the starting counter value and the sign is chosen depending on whether Up or Down count mode is selected.
108/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.3.1 TxINA = I/O - TxINB = I/O Input pins A and B are not used by the Timer. The counter clock is internally generated and the up/ down selection may be made only by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register. 9.2.3.2 TxINA = I/O - TxINB = Trigger The signal applied to input pin B acts as a trigger signal on REG1R register. The prescaler clock is internally generated and the up/down selection may be made only by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register. 9.2.3.3 TxINA = Gate - TxINB = I/O The signal applied to input pin A acts as a gate signal for the internal clock (i.e. the counter runs only when the gate signal is at a low level). The counter clock is internally generated and the up/down control may be made only by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register.
The prescaler clock is internally generated and the up/down selection may be made only by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register.
(*) The timer is in One shot mode and REGOR in Reload mode 9.2.3.7 TxINA = Gate - TxINB = Ext. Clock The signal applied to input pin B, gated by the signal applied to input pin A, acts as external clock for the prescaler. The up/down control may be made only by software action through the UDC bit in the TCR register.
9.2.3.4 TxINA = Gate - TxINB = Trigger Both input pins A and B are connected to the timer, with the resulting effect of combining the actions relating to the previously described configurations. 9.2.3.5 TxINA = I/O - TxINB = Ext. Clock The signal applied to input pin B is used as the external clock for the prescaler. The up/down selection may be made only by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register. 9.2.3.6 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = I/O The signal applied to input pin A acts as a trigger for REG0R, initiating the action for which the register was programmed (i.e. a reload or capture).
9.2.3.8 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = Trigger The signal applied to input pin A (or B) acts as trigger signal for REG0R (or REG1R), initiating the action for which the register has been programmed. The counter clock is internally generated and the up/down selection may be made only by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register.
109/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.3.9 TxINA = Clock Up - TxINB = Clock Down The edge received on input pin A (or B) performs a one step up (or down) count, so that the counter clock and the up/down control are external. Setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration, and input pin B has priority on input pin A.
9.2.3.11 TxINA = Trigger Up - TxINB = Trigger Down Up/down control is performed through both input pins A and B. A edge on input pin A sets the up count mode, while a edge on input pin B (which has priority on input pin A) sets the down count mode. The counter clock is internally generated, and setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration.
9.2.3.10 TxINA = Up/Down - TxINB = Ext Clock An High (or Low) level applied to input pin A sets the counter in the up (or down) count mode, while the signal applied to input pin B is used as clock for the prescaler. Setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration.
9.2.3.12 TxINA = Up/Down - TxINB = I/O An High (or Low) level of the signal applied on input pin A sets the counter in the up (or down) count mode. The counter clock is internally generated. Setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration.
110/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.3.13 Autodiscrimination Mode The phase between two pulses (respectively on input pin B and input pin A) generates a one step up (or down) count, so that the up/down control and the counter clock are both external. Thus, if the rising edge of TxINB arrives when TxINA is at a low level, the timer is incremented (no action if the rising edge of TxINB arrives when TxINA is at a high level). If the falling edge of TxINB arrives when TxINA is at a low level, the timer is decremented (no action if the falling edge of TxINB arrives when TxINA is at a high level). Setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration.
ture), while the signal applied to input pin B is used as the clock for the prescaler.
(*) The timer is in One shot mode and REG0R in reload mode 9.2.3.15 TxINA = Ext. Clock - TxINB = Trigger The signal applied to input pin B acts as a trigger, performing a capture on REG1R, while the signal applied to input pin A is used as the clock for the prescaler. 9.2.3.16 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = Gate The signal applied to input pin A acts as a trigger signal on REG0R, initiating the action for which the register was programmed (i.e. a reload or capture), while the signal applied to input pin B acts as a gate signal for the internal clock (i.e. the counter runs only when the gate signal is at a low level).
9.2.3.14 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = Ext. Clock The signal applied to input pin A acts as a trigger signal on REG0R, initiating the action for which the register was programmed (i.e. a reload or cap-
111/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.4 Output Pin Assignment Two external outputs are available when programmed as Alternate Function Outputs of the I/O pins. Two registers Output A Control Register (OACR) and Output B Control Register (OBCR) define the driver for the outputs and the actions to be performed. Each of the two output pins can be driven from any of the three possible sources: - Compare Register 0 event logic - Compare Register 1 event logic - Overflow/Underflow event logic. Each of these three sources can cause one of the following four actions on any of the two outputs: - Nop - Set - Reset - Toggle Furthermore an On Chip Event signal can be driven by two of the three sources: the Over/Underflow event and Compare 0 event by programming the CEV bit of the OACR register and the OEV bit of OBCR register respectively. This signal can be used internally to synchronise another on-chip peripheral. Output Waveforms Depending on the programming of OACR and OBCR, the following example waveforms can be generated on TxOUTA and TxOUTB pins. For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the Over/Underflow (OUF) and the Compare 0 event (CM0), and TxOUTB is driven by the Over/Underflow and Compare 1 event (CM1):
OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to "0", OUF sets TxOUTA, CM0 resets TxOUTA and CM1 does not affect the output. OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to "0", OUF sets TxOUTB, CM1 resets TxOUTB while CM0 does not affect the output.
OACR = [101100X0] OBCR = [111000X0] T0OUTA OUF COMP0 OUF COMP0 COMP1 T0OUTB OUF OUF COMP1
For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the Over/Underflow, by Compare 0 and by Compare 1; TxOUTB is driven by both Compare 0 and Compare 1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to "0". OUF toggles Output 0, as do CM0 and CM1. OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to "1". OUF does not affect the output; CM0 resets TxOUTB and CM1 sets it.
OACR = [010101X0] OBCR = [100011X1] COMP1 COMP1 T0OUTA OUF OUF COMP0 COMP0 COMP1 COMP1 T0OUTB COMP0 COMP0
112/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the Over/Underflow and by Compare 0, and TxOUTB is driven by the Over/Underflow and by Compare 1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to "0". OUF sets TxOUTA while CM0 resets it, and CM1 has no effect. OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to "1". OUF toggles TxOUTB, CM1 sets it and CM0 has no effect.
Output Waveform Samples In Biload Mode TxOUTA is programmed to monitor the two time intervals, t1 and t2, of the Biload Mode, while TxOUTB is independent of the Over/Underflow and is driven by the different values of Compare 0 and Compare 1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to "0". OUF toggles the output and CM0 and CM1 do not affect TxOUTA. OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to "0". OUF has no effect, while CM1 resets TxOUTB and CM0 sets it. Depending on the CM1/CM0 values, three different sample waveforms have been drawn based on the above mentioned configuration of OBCR. In the last case, with a different programmed value of OBCR, only Compare 0 drives TxOUTB, toggling the output.
For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the Over/Underflow and by Compare 0, and TxOUTB is driven by Compare 0 and 1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to "0". OUF sets TxOUTA, CM0 resets it and CM1 has no effect. OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to "0". OUF has no effect, CM0 sets TxOUTB and CM1 toggles it.
OACR = [101100X0] OBCR = [000111X0] T0OUTA OUF COMP0 OUF COMP0 COMP1 T0OUTB COMP0 COMP0 COMP1
Note (*) Depending on the CMP1R/CMP0R values
113/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.5 Interrupt and DMA 9.2.5.1 Timer Interrupt The timer has 5 different Interrupt sources, belonging to 3 independent groups, which are assigned to the following Interrupt vectors: Table 23. Timer Interrupt Structure
Interrupt Source COMP 0 COMP 1 CAPT 0 CAPT 1 Overflow/Underflow Vector Address xxxx x110 xxxx x100 xxxx x000
The three least significant bits of the vector pointer address represent the relative priority assigned to each group, where 000 represents the highest priority level. These relative priorities are fixed by hardware, according to the source which generates the interrupt request. The 5 most significant bits represent the general priority and are programmed by the user in the Interrupt Vector Register (T_IVR). Each source can be masked by a dedicated bit in the Interrupt/DMA Mask Register (IDMR) of each timer, as well as by a global mask enable bit (IDMR.7) which masks all interrupts. If an interrupt request (CM0 or CP0) is present before the corresponding pending bit is reset, an overrun condition occurs. This condition is flagged in two dedicated overrun bits, relating to the Comp0 and Capt0 sources, in the Timer Flag Register (T_FLAGR). 9.2.5.2 Timer DMA Two Independent DMA channels, associated with Comp0 and Capt0 respectively, allow DMA transfers from Register File or Memory to the Comp0 Register, and from the Capt0 Register to Register File or Memory). If DMA is enabled, the Capt0 and Comp0 interrupts are generated by the corresponding DMA End of Block event. Their priority is set by hardware as follows: - Compare 0 Destination -- Lower Priority - Capture 0 Source -- Higher Priority The two DMA request sources are independently maskable by the CP0D and CM0D DMA Mask bits in the IDMR register.
The two DMA End of Block interrupts are independently enabled by the CP0I and CM0I Interrupt mask bits in the IDMR register. 9.2.5.3 DMA Pointers The 6 programmable most significant bits of the DMA Counter Pointer Register (DCPR) and of the DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR) are common to both channels (Comp0 and Capt0). The Comp0 and Capt0 Address Pointers are mapped as a pair in the Register File, as are the Comp0 and Capt0 DMA Counter pair. In order to specify either the Capt0 or the Comp0 pointers, according to the channel being serviced, the Timer resets address bit 1 for CAPT0 and sets it for COMP0, when the D0 bit in the DCPR register is equal to zero (Word address in Register File). In this case (transfers between peripheral registers and memory), the pointers are split into two groups of adjacent Address and Counter pairs respectively. For peripheral register to register transfers (selected by programming "1" into bit 0 of the DCPR register), only one pair of pointers is required, and the pointers are mapped into one group of adjacent positions. The DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR) is not used in this case, but must be considered reserved. Figure 61. Pointer Mapping for Transfers between Registers and Memory
Register File Address Pointers Comp0 16 bit Addr Pointer Capt0 16 bit Addr Pointer YYYYYY11(l) YYYYYY10(h) YYYYYY01(l) YYYYYY00(h)
DMA Counters
Comp0 DMA 16 bit Counter Capt0 DMA 16 bit Counter
XXXXXX11(l) XXXXXX10(h) XXXXXX01(l) XXXXXX00(h)
114/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) Figure 62. Pointer Mapping for Register to Register Transfers
Register File 8 bit Counter 8 bit Addr Pointer 8 bit Counter 8 bit Addr Pointer XXXXXX11 Compare 0 XXXXXX10 XXXXXX01 Capture 0 XXXXXX00
9.2.5.4 DMA Transaction Priorities Each Timer DMA transaction is a 16-bit operation, therefore two bytes must be transferred sequentially, by means of two DMA transfers. In order to speed up each word transfer, the second byte transfer is executed by automatically forcing the peripheral priority to the highest level (000), regardless of the previously set level. It is then restored to its original value after executing the transfer. Thus, once a request is being serviced, its hardware priority is kept at the highest level regardless of the other Timer internal sources, i.e. once a Comp0 request is being serviced, it maintains a higher priority, even if a Capt0 request occurs between the two byte transfers.
9.2.5.5 DMA Swap Mode After a complete data table transfer, the transaction counter is reset and an End Of Block (EOB) condition occurs, the block transfer is completed. The End Of Block Interrupt routine must at this point reload both address and counter pointers of the channel referred to by the End Of Block interrupt source, if the application requires a continuous high speed data flow. This procedure causes speed limitations because of the time required for the reload routine. The SWAP feature overcomes this drawback, allowing high speed continuous transfers. Bit 2 of the DMA Counter Pointer Register (DCPR) and of the DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR), toggles after every End Of Block condition, alternately providing odd and even address (D2-D7) for the pair of pointers, thus pointing to an updated pair, after a block has been completely transferred. This allows the User to update or read the first block and to update the pointer values while the second is being transferred. These two toggle bits are software writable and readable, mapped in DCPR bit 2 for the CM0 channel, and in DAPR bit 2 for the CP0 channel (though a DMA event on a channel, in Swap mode, modifies a field in DAPR and DCPR common to both channels, the DAPR/ DCPR content used in the transfer is always the bit related to the correct channel). SWAP mode can be enabled by the SWEN bit in the IDCR Register. WARNING: Enabling SWAP mode affects both channels (CM0 and CP0).
115/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) 9.2.5.6 DMA End Of Block Interrupt Routine An interrupt request is generated after each block transfer (EOB) and its priority is the same as that assigned in the usual interrupt request, for the two channels. As a consequence, they will be serviced only when no DMA request occurs, and will be subject to a possible OUF Interrupt request, which has higher priority. The following is a typical EOB procedure (with swap mode enabled): - Test Toggle bit and Jump. - Reload Pointers (odd or even depending on toggle bit status). - Reset EOB bit: this bit must be reset only after the old pair of pointers has been restored, so that, if a new EOB condition occurs, the next pair of pointers is ready for swapping. - Verify the software protection condition (see Section 9.2.5.7). - Read the corresponding Overrun bit: this confirms that no DMA request has been lost in the meantime. - Reset the corresponding pending bit. - Reenable DMA with the corresponding DMA mask bit (must always be done after resetting the pending bit)
- Return. WARNING: The EOB bits are read/write only for test purposes. Writing a logical "1" by software (when the SWEN bit is set) will cause a spurious interrupt request. These bits are normally only reset by software. 9.2.5.7 DMA Software Protection A second EOB condition may occur before the first EOB routine is completed, this would cause a not yet updated pointer pair to be addressed, with consequent overwriting of memory. To prevent these errors, a protection mechanism is provided, such that the attempted setting of the EOB bit before it has been reset by software will cause the DMA mask on that channel to be reset (DMA disabled), thus blocking any further DMA operation. As shown above, this mask bit should always be checked in each EOB routine, to ensure that all DMA transfers are properly served. 9.2.6 Register Description Note: In the register description on the following pages, register and page numbers are given using the example of Timer 0. On devices with more than one timer, refer to the device register map for the adresses and page numbers.
116/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) CAPTURE LOAD 0 HIGH REGISTER (REG0HR) R240 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: undefined
7 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R9 0 R8
COMPARE 0 HIGH REGISTER (CMP0HR) R244 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R9 0 R8
This register is used to capture values from the Up/Down counter or load preset values (MSB). CAPTURE LOAD 0 LOW REGISTER (REG0LR) R241 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: undefined
7 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 0 R0
This register is used to store the MSB of the 16-bit value to be compared to the Up/Down counter content. COMPARE 0 LOW REGISTER (CMP0LR) R245 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 0 R0
This register is used to capture values from the Up/Down counter or load preset values (LSB). CAPTURE LOAD 1 HIGH REGISTER (REG1HR) R242 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: undefined
7 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R9 0 R8
This register is used to store the LSB of the 16-bit value to be compared to the Up/Down counter content. COMPARE 1 HIGH REGISTER (CMP1HR) R246 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R9 0 R8
This register is used to capture values from the Up/Down counter or load preset values (MSB). CAPTURE LOAD 1 LOW REGISTER (REG1LR) R243 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: undefined
7 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 0 R0
This register is used to store the MSB of the 16-bit value to be compared to the Up/Down counter content. COMPARE 1 LOW REGISTER (CMP1LR) R247 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 R0
This register is used to capture values from the Up/Down counter or load preset values (LSB).
R7
This register is used to store the LSB of the 16-bit value to be compared to the Up/Down counter content.
117/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (TCR) R248 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 CEN CCP CCMP CCL UDC 0 0 UDC S OF0 0 CS
Bit 3 = UDC: Up/Down software selection. If the direction of the counter is not fixed by hardware (TxINA and/or TxINB pins, see par. 10.3) it can be controlled by software using the UDC bit. 0: Down counting 1: Up counting Bit 2 = UDCS: Up/Down count status. This bit is read only and indicates the direction of the counter. 0: Down counting 1: Up counting Bit 1 = OF0: OVF/UNF state. This bit is read only. 0: No overflow or underflow occurred 1: Overflow or underflow occurred during a Capture on Register 0 Bit 0 = CS Counter Status. This bit is read only and indicates the status of the counter. 0: Counter halted 1: Counter running
Bit 7 = CEN: Counter enable. This bit is ANDed with the Global Counter Enable bit (GCEN) in the CICR register (R230). The GCEN bit is set after the Reset cycle. 0: Stop the counter and prescaler 1: Start the counter and prescaler (without reload). Note: Even if CEN=0, capture and loading will take place on a trigger event. Bit 6 = CCP0: Clear on capture. 0: No effect 1: Clear the counter and reload the prescaler on a REG0R or REG1R capture event Bit 5 = CCMP0: Clear on Compare. 0: No effect 1: Clear the counter and reload the prescaler on a CMP0R compare event Bit 4 = CCL: Counter clear. This bit is reset by hardware after being set by software (this bit always returns "0" when read). 0: No effect 1: Clear the counter without generating an interrupt request
118/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) TIMER MODE REGISTER (TMR) R249 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 OE1 OE0 BM RM1 RM0 ECK REN 0 C0
Bit 3 = RM0: REG0R mode. This bit works together with the BM and RM1 bits to select the timer operating mode. Refer to Table 24. Table 24. Timer Operating Modes
TMR Bits Timer Operating Modes BM RM1 RM0 1 x 0 Biload mode 1 x 1 Bicapture mode 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Load from REG0R and Monitor on REG1R Load from REG0R and Capture on REG1R Capture on REG0R and Monitor on REG1R Capture on REG0R and REG1R
Bit 7 = OE1: Output 1 enable. 0: Disable the Output 1 (TxOUTB pin) and force it high. 1: Enable the Output 1 (TxOUTB pin) The relevant I/O bit must also be set to Alternate Function Bit 6 = OE0: Output 0 enable. 0: Disable the Output 0 (TxOUTA pin) and force it high 1: Enable the Output 0 (TxOUTA pin). The relevant I/O bit must also be set to Alternate Function Bit 5 = BM: Bivalue mode. This bit works together with the RM1 and RM0 bits to select the timer operating mode (see Table 24). 0: Disable bivalue mode 1: Enable bivalue mode Bit 4 = RM1: REG1R mode. This bit works together with the BM and RM0 bits to select the timer operating mode. Refer to Table 24. Note: This bit has no effect when the Bivalue Mode is enabled (BM=1).
Bit 2 = ECK Timer clock control. 0: The prescaler clock source is selected depending on the IN0 - IN3 bits in the T_ICR register 1: Enter Parallel mode (for Timer 1 and Timer 3 only, no effect for Timer 0 and 2). See Section 9.2.2.12. Bit 1 = REN: Retrigger mode. 0: Enable retriggerable mode 1: Disable retriggerable mode Bit 0 = CO: Continous/One shot mode. 0: Continuous mode (with autoreload on End of Count condition) 1: One shot mode
119/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) EXTERNAL INPUT CONTROL (T_ICR) R250 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0 A0 A1
REGISTER
Bit 1:0 = B[0:1]: TxINB Pin event. These bits are set and cleared by software.
B0 0 0 1 1 B1 0 1 0 1 TxINB Pin Event No operation Falling edge sensitive Rising edge sensitive Rising and falling edges
0 B0 B1
Bit 7:4 = IN[3:0]: Input pin function. These bits are set and cleared by software.
IN[3:0] bits 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 TxINA Pin Function not used not used Gate Gate not used Trigger Gate Trigger Clock Up Up/Down Trigger Up Up/Down Autodiscr. Trigger Ext. Clock Trigger TxINB Input Pin Function not used Trigger not used Trigger Ext. Clock not used Ext. Clock Trigger Clock Down Ext. Clock Trigger Down not used Autodiscr. Ext. Clock Trigger Gate
PRESCALER REGISTER (PRSR) R251 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 0 P0
Bit 3:2 = A[0:1]: TxINA Pin event. These bits are set and cleared by software.
A0 0 0 1 1 A1 0 1 0 1 TxINA Pin Event No operation Falling edge sensitive Rising edge sensitive Rising and falling edges
This register holds the preset value for the 8-bit prescaler. The PRSR content may be modified at any time, but it will be loaded into the prescaler at the following prescaler underflow, or as a consequence of a counter reload (either by software or upon external request). Following a RESET condition, the prescaler is automatically loaded with 00h, so that the prescaler divides by 1 and the maximum counter clock is generated (OSCIN frequency divided by 6 when MODER.5 = DIV2 bit is set). The binary value programmed in the PRSR register is equal to the divider value minus one. For example, loading PRSR with 24 causes the prescaler to divide by 25.
120/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) OUTPUT A CONTROL REGISTER (OACR) R252 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000
7 0
Bit 3:2 = OUE[0:1]: OVF/UNF event bits. These bits are set and cleared by software.
OUE0 0 0 1 1 OUE1 0 1 0 1 Action on TxOUTA pin on an Overflow or Underflow on the U/D counter Set Toggle Reset NOP
C0E0 C0E1 C1E0 C1E1 OUE0 OUE1 CEV 0P
Note: Whenever more than one event occurs simultaneously, the action taken will be the result of ANDing the event bits xxE1-xxE0. Bit 7:6 = C0E[0:1]: COMP0 event bits. These bits are set and cleared by software.
Action on TxOUTA pin on a sucC0E0 0 0 1 1 C0E1 0 1 0 1
Note: Whenever more than one event occurs simultaneously, the action taken will be the result of ANDing the event xxE1-xxE0 bits. Bit 1 = CEV: On-Chip event on CMP0R. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: No action 1: A successful compare on CMP0R activates the on-chip event signal (a single pulse is generated) Bit 0 = OP: TxOUTA preset value. This bit is set and cleared by software and by hardware. The value of this bit is the preset value of the TxOUTA pin. Reading this bit returns the current state of the TxOUTA pin (useful when it is selected in toggle mode).
cessful compare of the CMP0R register
Set Toggle Reset NOP
Bit 5:4 = C1E[0:1]: COMP1 event bits. These bits are set and cleared by software.
C1E0 0 0 1 1 C1E1 0 1 0 1 Action on TxOUTA pin on a successful compare of the CMP1R register Set Toggle Reset NOP
121/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) OUTPUT B CONTROL REGISTER (OBCR) R253 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 0
Bit 3:2 = OUE[0:1]: OVF/UNF event bits. These bits are set and cleared by software.
OUE0 0 0 1 1 OUE1 0 1 0 1 Action on TxOUTB pin on an Overflow or Underflow on the U/D counter Set Toggle Reset NOP
C0E0 C0E1 C1E0 C1E1 OUE0 OUE1 OEV 0P
Note: Whenever more than one event occurs simultaneously, the action taken will be the result of ANDing the event bits xxE1-xxE0. Bit 7:6 = C0E[0:1]: COMP0 event bits. These bits are set and cleared by software.
Action on TxOUTB pin on a sucC0E0 0 0 1 1 C0E1 0 1 0 1
Bit 1 = OEV: On-Chip event on OVF/UNF. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: No action 1: An underflow/overflow activates the on-chip event signal (a single pulse is generated) Bit 0 = OP: TxOUTB preset value. This bit is set and cleared by software and by hardware. The value of this bit is the preset value of the TxOUTB pin. Reading this bit returns the current state of the TxOUTB pin (useful when it is selected in toggle mode).
cessful compare of the CMP0R register
Set Toggle Reset NOP
Bit 5:4 = C1E[0:1]: COMP1 event bits. These bits are set and cleared by software.
C1E0 0 0 1 1 C1E1 0 1 0 1 Action on TxOUTB pin on a successful compare of the CMP1R register Set Toggle Reset NOP
122/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) FLAG REGISTER (T_FLAGR) R254 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 CP0 CP1 CM0 CM1 OUF OCP OCM 0 0 0 A0
GTIEN and CM1I bits in the IDMR register are set. The CM1 bit is cleared by software. 0: No Compare 1 event 1: Compare 1 event occurred Bit 3 = OUF: Overflow/Underflow. This bit is set by hardware after a counter Over/ Underflow condition. An interrupt is generated if GTIEN and OUI=1 in the IDMR register. The OUF bit is cleared by software. 0: No counter overflow/underflow 1: Counter overflow/underflow Bit 2 = OCP0: Overrun on Capture 0. This bit is set by hardware when more than one INT/DMA requests occur before the CP0 flag is cleared by software or whenever a capture is simulated by setting the CP0 flag by software. The OCP0 flag is cleared by software. 0: No capture 0 overrun 1: Capture 0 overrun Bit 1 = OCM0: Overrun on compare 0. This bit is set by hardware when more than one INT/DMA requests occur before the CM0 flag is cleared by software.The OCM0 flag is cleared by software. 0: No compare 0 overrun 1: Compare 0 overrun Bit 0 = A0: Capture interrupt function. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Configure the capture interrupt as an OR function of REG0R/REG1R captures 1: Configure the capture interrupt as an AND function of REG0R/REG1R captures
Bit 7 = CP0: Capture 0 flag. This bit is set by hardware after a capture on REG0R register. An interrupt is generated depending on the value of the GTIEN, CP0I bits in the IDMR register and the A0 bit in the T_FLAGR register. The CP0 bit must be cleared by software. Setting by software acts as a software load/capture to/from the REG0R register. 0: No Capture 0 event 1: Capture 0 event occurred Bit 6 = CP1: Capture 1 flag. This bit is set by hardware after a capture on REG1R register. An interrupt is generated depending on the value of the GTIEN, CP0I bits in the IDMR register and the A0 bit in the T_FLAGR register. The CP1 bit must be cleared by software. Setting by software acts as a capture event on the REG1R register, except when in Bicapture mode. 0: No Capture 1 event 1: Capture 1 event occurred Bit 5 = CM0: Compare 0 flag. This bit is set by hardware after a successful compare on the CMP0R register. An interrupt is generated if the GTIEN and CM0I bits in the IDMR register are set. The CM0 bit is cleared by software. 0: No Compare 0 event 1: Compare 0 event occurred Bit 4 = CM1: Compare 1 flag. This bit is set after a successful compare on CMP1R register. An interrupt is generated if the
123/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) INTERRUPT/DMA MASK REGISTER (IDMR) R255 - Read/Write Register Page: 10 Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 GTCP0D CP0I IEN CP1I CM0 CM0I CM1I D 0 OUI
Bit 1 = CM1I: Compare 1 Interrupt mask. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable compare on CMP1R interrupt 1: Enable compare on CMP1R interrupt Bit 0 = OUI: Overflow/Underflow interrupt mask. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable Overflow/Underflow interrupt 1: Enable Overflow/Underflow interrupt DMA COUNTER POINTER REGISTER (DCPR) R240 - Read/Write Register Page: 9 Reset value: undefined
7 DCP7 DCP6 DCP5 DCP4 DCP3 DCP2 0 DMA REG/ SRCE MEM
Bit 7 = GTIEN: Global timer interrupt enable. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable all Timer interrupts 1: Enable all timer Timer Interrupts from enabled sources Bit 6 = CP0D: Capture 0 DMA mask. This bit is set by software to enable a Capt0 DMA transfer and cleared by hardware at the end of the block transfer. 0: Disable capture on REG0R DMA 1: Enable capture on REG0R DMA Bit 5 = CP0I: Capture 0 interrupt mask. 0: Disable capture on REG0R interrupt 1: Enable capture on REG0R interrupt (or Capt0 DMA End of Block interrupt if CP0D=1) Bit 4 = CP1I: Capture 1 interrupt mask. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable capture on REG1R interrupt 1: Enable capture on REG1R interrupt Bit 3 = CM0D: Compare 0 DMA mask. This bit is set by software to enable a Comp0 DMA transfer and cleared by hardware at the end of the block transfer. 0: Disable compare on CMP0R DMA 1: Enable compare on CMP0R DMA Bit 2 = CM0I: Compare 0 Interrupt mask. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable compare on CMP0R interrupt 1: Enable compare on CMP0R interrupt (or Comp0 DMA End of Block interrupt if CM0D=1)
Bit 7:2 = DCP[7:2]: MSBs of DMA counter register address. These are the most significant bits of the DMA counter register address programmable by software. The DCP2 bit may also be toggled by hardware if the Timer DMA section for the Compare 0 channel is configured in Swap mode. Bit 1 = DMA-SRCE: DMA source selection. This bit is set and cleared by hardware. 0: DMA source is a Capture on REG0R register 1: DMA destination is a Compare on CMP0R register Bit 0 = REG/MEM: DMA area selection. This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects the source and destination of the DMA area 0: DMA from/to memory 1: DMA from/to Register File
124/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) DMA ADDRESS POINTER REGISTER (DAPR) R241 - Read/Write Register Page: 9 Reset value: undefined
7 DAP 7 0 DAP DMA PRG DAP5 DAP4 DAP3 DAP2 6 SRCE /DAT
INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (T_IVR) R242 - Read/Write Register Page: 9 Reset value: xxxx xxx0
7 V4 V3 V2 V1 V0 W1 W0 0 0
Bit 7:2 = DAP[7:2]: MSB of DMA address register location. These are the most significant bits of the DMA address register location programmable by software. The DAP2 bit may also be toggled by hardware if the Timer DMA section for the Compare 0 channel is configured in Swap mode. Note: During a DMA transfer with the Register File, the DAPR is not used; however, in Swap mode, DAPR(2) is used to point to the correct table. Bit 1 = DMA-SRCE: DMA source selection. This bit is fixed by hardware. 0: DMA source is a Capture on REG0R register 1: DMA destination is a Compare on the CMP0R register Bit 0 = PRG/DAT: DMA memory selection. This bit is set and cleared by software. It is only meaningful if DCPR.REG/MEM=0. 0: The ISR register is used to extend the address of data transferred by DMA (see MMU chapter). 1: The DMASR register is used to extend the address of data transferred by DMA (see MMU chapter).
REG/MEM PRG/DAT DMA Source/Destination 0 0 ISR register used to address memory 0 1 DMASR register used to address memory 1 0 Register file 1 1 Register file
This register is used as a vector, pointing to the 16-bit interrupt vectors in memory which contain the starting addresses of the three interrupt subroutines managed by each timer. Only one Interrupt Vector Register is available for each timer, and it is able to manage three interrupt groups, because the 3 least significant bits are fixed by hardware depending on the group which generated the interrupt request. In order to determine which request generated the interrupt within a group, the T_FLAGR register can be used to check the relevant interrupt source. Bit 7:3 = V[4:0]: MSB of the vector address. These bits are user programmable and contain the five most significant bits of the Timer interrupt vector addresses in memory. In any case, an 8-bit address can be used to indicate the Timer interrupt vector locations, because they are within the first 256 memory locations (see Interrupt and DMA chapters). Bit 2:1 = W[1:0]: Vector address bits. These bits are equivalent to bit 1 and bit 2 of the Timer interrupt vector addresses in memory. They are fixed by hardware, depending on the group of sources which generated the interrupt request as follows:.
W1 0 0 1 1 W0 0 1 0 1 Interrupt Source Overflow/Underflow even interrupt Not available Capture event interrupt Compare event interrupt
Bit 0 = This bit is forced by hardware to 0.
125/190
9
ST90158 - MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont'd) INTERRUPT/DMA CONTROL REGISTER (IDCR) R243 - Read/Write Register Page: 9 Reset value: 1100 0111 (C7h)
7 CPE CME DCTS DCT SWE D N PL2 PL1 0 PL0
Bit 3 = SWEN: Swap function enable. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Disable Swap mode 1: Enable Swap mode for both DMA channels. Bit 2:0 = PL[2:0]: Interrupt/DMA priority level. With these three bits it is possible to select the Interrupt and DMA priority level of each timer, as one of eight levels (see Interrupt/DMA chapter). I/O CONNECTION REGISTER (IOCR) R248 - Read/Write Register Page: 9 Reset value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
7 0 SC1 SC0
Bit 7 = CPE: Capture 0 EOB. This bit is set by hardware when the End Of Block condition is reached during a Capture 0 DMA operation with the Swap mode enabled. When Swap mode is disabled (SWEN bit = "0"), the CPE bit is forced to 1 by hardware. 0: No end of block condition 1: Capture 0 End of block Bit 6 = CME: Compare 0 EOB. This bit is set by hardware when the End Of Block condition is reached during a Compare 0 DMA operation with the Swap mode enabled. When the Swap mode is disabled (SWEN bit = "0"), the CME bit is forced to 1 by hardware. 0: No end of block condition 1: Compare 0 End of block Bit 5 = DCTS: DMA capture transfer source. This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects the source of the DMA operation related to the channel associated with the Capture 0. Note: The I/O port source is available only on specific devices. 0: REG0R register 1: I/O port. Bit 4 = DCTD: DMA compare transfer destination. This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects the destination of the DMA operation related to the channel associated with Compare 0. Note: The I/O port destination is available only on specific devices. 0: CMP0R register 1: I/O port
Bit 7:2 = not used. Bit 1 = SC1: Select connection odd. This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects if the TxOUTA and TxINA pins for Timer 1 and Timer 3 are connected on-chip or not. 0: T1OUTA / T1INA and T3OUTA/ T3INA unconnected 1: T1OUTA connected internally to T1INA and T3OUTA connected internally to T3INA Bit 0 = SC0: Select connection even. This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects if the TxOUTA and TxINA pins for Timer 0 and Timer 2 are connected on-chip or not. 0: T0OUTA / T0INA and T2OUTA/ T2INA unconnected 1: T0OUTA connected internally to T0INA and T2OUTA connected internally to T2INA Note: Timer 1 and 2 are available only on some devices. Refer to the device block diagram and register map.
126/190
9
ST90158 - STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
9.3 STANDARD TIMER (STIM) Important Note: This chapter is a generic description of the STIM peripheral. Depending on the ST9 device, some or all of the interface signals described may not be connected to external pins. For the list of STIM pins present on the particular ST9 device, refer to the pinout description in the first section of the data sheet. 9.3.1 Introduction The Standard Timer includes a programmable 16bit down counter and an associated 8-bit prescaler with Single and Continuous counting modes capability. The Standard Timer uses an input pin (STIN) and an output (STOUT) pin. These pins, when available, may be independent pins or connected as Alternate Functions of an I/O port bit. STIN can be used in one of four programmable input modes: - event counter, - gated external input mode, Figure 63. Standard Timer Block Diagram
n
- triggerable input mode, - retriggerable input mode. STOUT can be used to generate a Square Wave or Pulse Width Modulated signal. The Standard Timer is composed of a 16-bit down counter with an 8-bit prescaler. The input clock to the prescaler can be driven either by an internal clock equal to INTCLK divided by 4, or by CLOCK2 derived directly from the external oscillator, divided by device dependent prescaler value, thus providing a stable time reference independent from the PLL programming or by an external clock connected to the STIN pin. The Standard Timer End Of Count condition is able to generate an interrupt which is connected to one of the external interrupt channels. The End of Count condition is defined as the Counter Underflow, whenever 00h is reached.
INEN INMD1 INMD2 INPUT & (See Note 2) CLOCK CONTROL LOGIC INTCLK/4 CLOCK2/x OUTMD1 OUTMD2 STOUT1 OUTPU T CONTROL LOGIC EXTERN AL INTERRUPT 1 INTER RUPT CONTROL LOGIC INTS MUX STAN DARD TIMER CLOCK STP 8-BIT PRESCALER STH,STL 16-BIT DOWNCOUNTER
STIN1
END OF COUNT
INTERRUPT REQUEST Note 1: Pin not present on all ST9 devices. Note 2: Depending on device, the source of the INPUT & CLOCK CONTROL LOGIC block may be permanently connected either to STIN or the RCCU signal CLOCK2/x. In devices without STIN and CLOCK2, the INEN bit must be held at 0.
127/190
9
ST90158 - STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
STANDARD TIMER (Cont'd) 9.3.2 Functional Description 9.3.2.1 Timer/Counter control Start-stop Count. The ST-SP bit (STC.7) is used in order to start and stop counting. An instruction which sets this bit will cause the Standard Timer to start counting at the beginning of the next instruction. Resetting this bit will stop the counter. If the counter is stopped and restarted, counting will resume from the value held at the stop condition, unless a new constant has been entered in the Standard Timer registers during the stop period. In this case, the new constant will be loaded as soon as counting is restarted. A new constant can be written in STH, STL, STP registers while the counter is running. The new value of the STH and STL registers will be loaded at the next End of Count condition, while the new value of the STP register will be loaded immediately. WARNING: In order to prevent incorrect counting of the StandardTimer,the prescaler(STP) andcounter (STL, STH) registers must be initialised before the starting of the timer. If this is not done, counting will start with the reset values (STH=FFh, STL=FFh, STP=FFh). Single/Continuous Mode. The S-C bit (STC.6) selects between the Single or Continuous mode. SINGLE MODE: at the End of Count, the Standard Timer stops, reloads the constant and resets the Start/Stop bit (the user programmer can inspect the timer current status by reading this bit). Setting the Start/Stop bit will restart the counter. CONTINUOUS MODE: At the End of the Count, the counter automatically reloads the constant and restarts. Itis only stoppedbyresettingtheStart/Stop bit. The S-C bit can be written either with the timer stopped or running. It is possible to toggle the S-C bit and start the Standard Timer with the same instruction. 9.3.2.2 Standard Timer Input Modes (ST9 devices with Standard Timer Input STIN) Bits INMD2, INMD1 and INEN are used to select the input modes. The Input Enable (INEN) bit ena-
bles the input mode selected by the INMD2 and INMD1 bits. If the input is disabled (INEN="0"), the values of INMD2 and INMD1 are not taken into account. In this case, this unit acts as a 16-bit timer (plus prescaler) directly driven by INTCLK/4 and transitions on the input pin have no effect. Event Counter Mode (INMD1 = "0", INMD2 = "0") The Standard Timer is driven by the signal applied to the input pin (STIN) which acts as an external clock. The unit works therefore as an event counter. The event is a high to low transition on STIN. Spacing between trailing edges should be at least the period of INTCLK multiplied by 8 (i.e. the maximum Standard Timer input frequency is 2.5 MHz with INTCLK = 20MHz). Gated Input Mode (INMD1 = "0", INMD2 = "1") The Timer uses the internal clock (INTCLK divided by 4) and starts and stops the Timer according to the state of STIN pin. When the status of the STIN is High the Standard Timer count operation proceeds, and when Low, counting is stopped. Triggerable Input Mode(INMD1= "1",INMD2="0") The Standard Timer is started by: a) setting the Start-Stop bit, AND b) a High to Low (low trigger) transition on STIN. In order to stop the Standard Timer in this mode, it is only necessary to reset the Start-Stop bit. Retriggerable Input Mode (INMD1 = "1", INMD2 = "1") In this mode, when the Standard Timer is running (with internal clock), a High to Low transition on STIN causes the counting to start from the last constant loaded into the STL/STH and STP registers. When the Standard Timer is stopped (ST-SP bit equal to zero), a High to Low transition on STIN has no effect. 9.3.2.3 Time Base Generator (ST9 devices without Standard Timer Input STIN) For devices where STIN is replaced by a connection to CLOCK2, the condition (INMD1 = "0", INMD2 = "0") will allow the Standard Timer to generate a stable time base independent from the PLL programming.
128/190
9
ST90158 - STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
STANDARD TIMER (Cont'd) 9.3.2.4 Standard Timer Output Modes OUTPUT modes are selected using 2 bits of the STC register: OUTMD1 and OUTMD2. No Output Mode (OUTMD1 = "0", OUTMD2 = "0") The output is disabled and the corresponding pin is set high, in order to allow other alternate functions to use the I/O pin. Square Wave Output Mode (OUTMD1 = "0", OUTMD2 = "1") The Standard Timer toggles the state of the STOUT pin on every End Of Count condition. With INTCLK = 12MHz, this allows generation of a square wave with a period ranging from 666ns to 11.18 seconds. PWM Output Mode (OUTMD1 = "1") The value of the OUTMD2 bit is transferred to the STOUT output pin at the End Of Count. This allows the user to generate PWM signals, by modifying the status of OUTMD2 between End of Count events, based on software counters decremented on the Standard Timer interrupt. 9.3.3 Interrupt Selection The Standard Timer may generate an interrupt request at every End of Count. Bit 2 of the STC register (INTS) selects the interrupt source between the Standard Timer interrupt and the external interrupt pin. Thus the Standard Timer Interrupt uses the interrupt channel and takes the priority and vector of the external interrupt channel. If INTS is set to "1", the Standard Timer interrupt is disabled; otherwise, an interrupt request is generated at every End of Count. Note: When enabling or disabling the Standard Timer Interrupt (writing INTS in the STC register) an edge may be generated on the interrupt channel, causing an unwanted interrupt. To avoid this spurious interrupt request, the INTS bit should be accessed only when the interrupt log-
ic is disabled (i.e. after the DI instruction). It is also necessary to clear any possible interrupt pending requests on the corresponding external interrupt channel before enabling it. A delay instruction (i.e. a NOP instruction) must be inserted between the reset of the interrupt pending bit and the INTS write instruction. 9.3.4 Register Mapping Depending on the ST9 device there may be up to 4 Standard Timers (refer to the block diagram in the first section of the data sheet). Each Standard Timer has 4 registers mapped into Page 11 in Group F of the Register File In the register description on the following page, register addresses refer to STIM0 only.
STD Timer Register STIM0 STH0 STL0 STP0 STC0 STIM1 STH1 STL1 STP1 STC1 STIM2 STH2 STL2 STP2 STC2 STH3 STL3 STP3 STC3 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R247 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 R255 Register Address (F0h) (F1h) (F2h) (F3h) (F4h) (F5h) (F6h) (F7h) (F8h) (F9h) (FAh) (FBh) (FCh) (FDh) (FEh) (FFh)
STIM3
Note: The four standard timers are not implemented on all ST9 devices. Refer to the block diagram of the device for the number of timers.
129/190
9
ST90158 - STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
STANDARD TIMER (Cont'd) 9.3.5 Register Description COUNTER HIGH BYTE REGISTER (STH) R240 - Read/Write Register Page: 11 Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7 0
STANDARD TIMER CONTROL (STC) R243 - Read/Write Register Page: 11 Reset value: 0001 0100 (14h)
7 STSP S-C
REGISTER
0 INMD INMD OUTM INEN INTS 1 2 D1 OUTM D2
ST.15 ST.14 ST.13 ST.12 ST.11 ST.10 ST.9 ST.8
Bit 7:0 = ST.[15:8]: Counter High-Byte. COUNTER LOW BYTE REGISTER (STL) R241 - Read/Write Register Page: 11 Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7 ST.7 ST.6 ST.5 ST.4 ST.3 ST.2 0 ST.1 ST.0
Bit 7 = ST-SP: Start-Stop Bit. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Stop counting 1: Start counting Bit 6 = S-C: Single-Continuous Mode Select. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Continuous Mode 1: Single Mode Bit 5:4 = INMD[1:2]: Input Mode Selection. These bits select the Input functions as shown in Section 9.3.2.2, when enabled by INEN.
INMD1 0 0 1 1 INMD2 0 1 0 1 Mode Event Counter mode Gated input mode Triggerable mode Retriggerable mode
Bit 7:0 = ST.[7:0]: Counter Low Byte. Writing to the STH and STL registers allows the user to enter the Standard Timer constant, while reading it provides the counter's current value. Thus it is possible to read the counter on-the-fly. STANDARD TIMER PRESCALER REGISTER (STP) R242 - Read/Write Register Page: 11 Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7 0
STP.7 STP.6 STP.5 STP.4 STP.3 STP.2 STP.1 STP.0
Bit 3 = INEN: Input Enable. This bit is set and cleared by software. If neither the STIN pin nor the CLOCK2 line are present, INEN must be 0. 0: Input section disabled 1: Input section enabled Bit 2 = INTS: Interrupt Selection. 0: Standard Timer interrupt enabled 1: Standard Timer interrupt is disabled and the external interrupt pin is enabled. Bit 1:0 = OUTMD[1:2]: Output Mode Selection. These bits select the output functions as described in Section 9.3.2.4.
OUTMD1 0 0 1 OUTMD2 0 1 x Mode No output mode Square wave output mode PWM output mode
Bit 7:0 = STP.[7:0]: Prescaler. The Prescaler value for the Standard Timer is programmed into this register. When reading the STP register, the returned value corresponds to the programmed data instead of the current data. 00h: No prescaler 01h: Divide by 2 FFh: Divide by 256
130/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
9.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) 9.4.1 Introduction The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) is a general purpose on-chip shift register peripheral. It allows communication with external peripherals via an SPI protocol bus. In addition, special operating modes allow reduced software overhead when implementing I2Cbus and IM-bus communication standards. The SPI uses up to 3 pins: Serial Data In (SDI), Serial Data Out (SDO) and Synchronous Serial Clock (SCK). Additional I/O pins may act as device selects or IM-bus address identifier signals. The main features are: s Full duplex synchronous transfer if 3 I/O pins are used Figure 64. Block Diagram
SDO SDI SCK/INT2
Master operation only s 4 Programmable bit rates s Programmable clock polarity and phase s Busy Flag s End of transmission interrupt s Additional hardware to facilitate more complex protocols 9.4.2 Device-Specific Options Depending on the ST9 variant and package type, the SPI interface signals may not be connected to separate external pins. Refer to the Peripheral Configuration Chapter for the device pin-out.
s
READ BUFFER
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE DATA REGISTER ( SPIDR )
*
R253 DATA BUS
END OF TRANSMISSION
INT2
INT2 POLARITY 1 0
MULTIPLEXER
PHASE
BAUD RATE
INTCLK
SPEN BMS ARB BUSY CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0
R254
INTERNAL SERIAL CLOCK TO MSPI CONTROL LOGIC
ST9 INTERRUPT INTB0
SERIAL PERIPHERAL CONTROL REGISTER ( SPICR )
* Common for Transmit and Receive
n
VR000347
131/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.4.3 Functional Description The SPI, when enabled, receives input data from the internal data bus to the SPI Data Register (SPIDR). A Serial Clock (SCK) is generated by controlling through software two bits in the SPI Control Register (SPICR). The data is parallel loaded into the 8 bit shift register during a write cycle. This is shifted out serially via the SDO pin, MSB first, to the slave device, which responds by sending its data to the master device via the SDI pin. This implies full duplex transmission if 3 I/O pins are used with both the data-out and data-in synchronized with the same clock signal, SCK. Thus the transmitted byte is replaced by the received byte, eliminating the need for separate "Tx empty" and "Rx full" status bits. When the shift register is loaded, data is parallel transferred to the read buffer and becomes available to the CPU during a subsequent read cycle. The SPI requires three I/O port pins: SCK Serial Clock signal SDO Serial Data Out SDI Serial Data In An additional I/O port output bit may be used as a slave chip select signal. Data and Clock pins I C Bus protocol are open-drain to allow arbitration and multiplexing. Figure 65 below shows a typical SPI network. Figure 65. A Typical SPI Network
n
9.4.3.1 Input Signal Description Serial Data In (SDI) Data is transferred serially from a slave to a master on this line, most significant bit first. In an SBUS/I2C-bus configuration, the SDI line senses the value forced on the data line (by SDO or by another peripheral connected to the S-bus/I2C-bus). 9.4.3.2 Output Signal Description Serial Data Out (SDO) The SDO pin is configured as an output for the master device. This is obtained by programming the corresponding I/O pin as an output alternate function. Data is transferred serially from a master to a slave on SDO, most significant bit first. The master device always allows data to be applied on the SDO line one half cycle before the clock edge, in order to latch the data for the slave device. The SDO pin is forced to high impedance when the SPI is disabled. During an S-Bus or I2C-Bus protocol, when arbitration is lost, SDO is set to one (thus not driving the line, as SDO is configured as an open drain). Master Serial Clock (SCK) The master device uses SCK to latch the incoming data on the SDI line. This pin is forced to a high impedance state when SPI is disabled (SPEN, SPICR.7 = "0"), in order to avoid clock contention from different masters in a multi-master system. The master device generates the SCK clock from INTCLK. The SCK clock is used to synchronize data transfer, both in to and out of the device, through its SDI and SDO pins. The SCK clock type, and its relationship with data is controlled by the CPOL (Clock Polarity) and CPHA (Clock Phase) bits in the Serial Peripheral Control Register (SPICR). This input is provided with a digital filter which eliminates spikes lasting less than one INTCLK period. Two bits, SPR1 and SPR0, in the Serial Peripheral Control Register (SPICR), select the clock rate. Four frequencies can be selected, two in the high frequency range (mostly used with the SPI protocol) and two in the medium frequency range (mostly used with more complex protocols).
132/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) Figure 66. SPI I/O Pins
n
SCK SDO SDI
SPI
PORT BIT DATA BUS LATCH
SDI
PORT BIT LATCH
SCK INT2
PORT BIT LATCH INT2
SDO
9.4.4 Interrupt Structure The SPI peripheral is associated with external interrupt channel B0 (pin INT2). Multiplexing between the external pin and the SPI internal source is controlled by the SPEN and BMS bits, as shown in Table 25. The two possible SPI interrupt sources are: - End of transmission (after each byte). - S-bus/I2C-bus start or stop condition. Care should be taken when toggling the SPEN and/or BMS bits from the "0,0" condition. Before changing the interrupt source from the external pin to the internal function, the B0 interrupt channel should be masked. EIMR.2 (External Interrupt Mask Register, bit 2, IMBO) and EIPR.2 (External Interrupt Pending Register bit 2, IMP0) should be "0" before changing the source. This sequence of events is to avoid the generating and reading of spurious interrupts. A delay instruction lasting at least 4 clock cycles (e.g. 2 NOPs) should be inserted between the SPEN toggle instruction and the Interrupt Pending bit reset instruction. The INT2 input Function is always mapped together with the SCK input Function, to allow Start/Stop bit detection when using S-bus/I2C-bus protocols. A start condition occurs when SDI goes from "1" to "0" and SCK is "1". The Stop condition occurs when SDI goes from "0" to "1" and SCK is "1". For both Stop and Start conditions, SPEN = "0" and BMS = "1". Table 25. Interrupt Configuration
SPEN 0 0 1 BMS 0 1 X Interrupt Source External channel INT2 S-bus/I2C bus start or stop condition End of a byte transmission
133/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.4.5 Working With Other Protocols The SPI peripheral offers the following facilities for operation with S-bus/I2C-bus and IM-bus protocols: s Interrupt request on start/stop detection s Hardware clock synchronisation s Arbitration lost flag with an automatic set of data line Note that the I/O bit associated with the SPI should be returned to a defined state as a normal I/O pin before changing the SPI protocol. The following paragraphs provide information on how to manage these protocols. 9.4.6 I2C-bus Interface The I 2C-bus is a two-wire bidirectional data-bus, the two lines being SDA (Serial DAta) and SCL (Serial CLock). Both are open drain lines, to allow arbitration. As shown in Figure 68, data is toggled with clock low. An I C bus start condition is the transition on SDI from 1 to 0 with the SCK held high. In a stop condition, the SCK is also high and the transition on SDI is from 0 to 1. During both of these conditions, if SPEN = 0 and BMS = 1 then an interrupt request is performed.
Each transmission consists of nine clock pulses (SCL line). The first 8 pulses transmit the byte (MSB first), the ninth pulse is used by the receiver to acknowledge. Figure 67. S-Bus / I2C-bus Peripheral Compatibility without S-Bus Chip Select
134/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) Table 26. Typical I2C-bus Sequences
Phase Software SPICR.CPOL, CPHA = 0, 0 SPICR.SPEN = 0 SPICR.BMS = 1 SCK pin set as AF output SDI pin set as input Set SDO port bit to 1 SDO pin set as output Open Drain Set SDO port bit to 0 SPICR.SPEN = 1 SDO pin as Alternate Function output load data into SPIDR SPICR.SPEN = 0 Poll SDA line Set SDA line SPICR.SPEN = 1 SDO pin set as output Open Drain SPICR.SPEN = 0 Set SDO port bit to 1 Hardware Notes Set polarity and phase SPI disable START/STO P interrupt Enable
INITIALIZE
SCK, SDO in HI-Z SCL, SDA = 1, 1
START
SDA = 0, SCL = 1 interrupt request SCL = 0 Start transmission Interrupt request at end of byte transmission SCK, SDO in HI-Z SCL, SDA = 1 SCL = 0 SDA = 1 interrupt request
START condition receiver START detection Managed by interrupt routine load FFh when receiving end of transmission detection SPI disable only if transmitting only if receiving only if transmitting
TRANSMISSION
ACKNOWLEDGE
STOP
STOP condition
Figure 68. SPI Data and Clock Timing (for I2C protocol)
1st BYTE SDA
AcK
th n BYTE
AcK
SCL 1 2 8 9 1 2 8 9
START CONDITION
n
CLOCK PULSE FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DRIVEN BY SOFTWARE
CLOCK PULSE FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DRIVEN BY SW STOP CONDITION
VR000188
135/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) The data on the SDA line is sampled on the low to high transition of the SCL line. SPI working with an I2C-bus To use the SPI with the I2C-bus protocol, the SCK line is used as SCL; the SDI and SDO lines, externally wire-ORed, are used as SDA. All output pins must be configured as open drain (see Figure 67). Figure 26 illustrates the typical I2C-bus sequence, comprising 5 phases: Initialization, Start, Transmission, Acknowledge and Stop. It should be noted that only the first 8 bits are handled by the SPI peripheral; the ACKNOWLEDGE bit must be managed by software, by polling or forcing the SCL and SDO lines via the corresponding I/O port bits. During the transmission phase, the following I2Cbus features are also supported by hardware. Clock Synchronization In a multimaster I2C-bus system, when several masters generate their own clock, synchronization is required. The first master which releases the SCL line stops internal counting, restarting only when the SCL line goes high (released by all the other masters). In this manner, devices using difFigure 69. SPI Arbitration
ST9-1 INTERNAL SERIAL CLOCK SCK
ferent clock sources and different frequencies can be interfaced. Arbitration Lost When several masters are sending data on the SDA line, the following takes place: if the transmitter sends a "1" and the SDA line is forced low by another device, the ARB flag (SPICR.5) is set and the SDO buffer is disabled (ARB is reset and the SDO buffer is enabled when SPIDR is written to again). When BMS is set, the peripheral clock is supplied through the INT2 line by the external clock line (SCL). Due to potential noise spikes (which must last longer than one INTCLK period to be detected), RX or TX may gain a clock pulse. Referring to Figure 69, if device ST9-1 detects a noise spike and therefore gains a clock pulse, it will stop its transmission early and hold the clock line low, causing device ST9-2 to freeze on the 7th bit. To exit and recover from this condition, the BMS bit must be reset; this will cause the SPI logic to be reset, thus aborting the current transmission. An End of Transmission interrupt is generated following this reset sequence.
ST9-2 INTERNAL SERIAL CLOCK SCK
0 MSPI
CONTROL
0 MSPI
CONTROL
LOGIC 1 BHS INT 2 INT 2 1 BHS
LOGIC
ST9-2-SCK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SPIKE ST9-1-SCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VR001410
n n
136/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.4.7 S-Bus Interface The S-bus is a three-wire bidirectional data-bus, possessing functional features similar to the I2Cbus. As opposed to the I2C-bus, the Start/Stop conditions are determined by encoding the information on 3 wires rather than on 2, as shown in Figure 71. The additional line is referred as SEN. Figure 70. Mixed S-bus and I 2C-bus System
SCL SDA SEN 1 START
n
SPI Working with S-bus The S-bus protocol uses the same pin configuration as the I2C-bus for generating the SCL and SDA lines. The additional SEN line is managed through a standard ST9 I/O port line, under software control (see Figure 67).
2
3
4
5
6 STOP
VA00440
Figure 71. S-bus Configuration
n
137/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.4.8 IM-bus Interface The IM-bus features a bidirectional data line and a clock line; in addition, it requires an IDENT line to distinguish an address byte from a data byte (Figure 73). Unlike the I2C-bus protocol, the IM-bus protocol sends the least significant bit first; this requires a software routine which reverses the bit order before sending, and after receiving, a data byte. Figure 72 shows the connections between an IM-bus peripheral and an ST9 SPI. The SDO and SDI pins are connected to the bidirectional data pin of the peripheral device. The SDO alternate function is configured as Open-Drain (external 2.5K pull-up resistors are required). With this type of configuration, data is sent to the peripheral by writing the data byte to the SPIDR register. To receive data from the peripheral, the user should write FFh to the SPIDR register, in order to generate the shift clock pulses. As the SDO Figure 72. ST9 and IM-bus Peripheral
VDD 2x 2.5 K
line is set to the Open-Drain configuration, the incoming data bits that are set to "1" do not affect the SDO/SDI line status (which defaults to a high level due to the FFh value in the transmit register), while incoming bits that are set to "0" pull the input line low. In software it is necessary to initialise the ST9 SPI by setting both CPOL and CPHA to "1". By using a general purpose I/O as the IDENT line, and forcing it to a logical "0" when writing to the SPIDR register, an address is sent (or read). Then, by setting this bit to "1" and writing to SPIDR, data is sent to the peripheral. When all the address and data pairs are sent, it is necessary to drive the IDENT line low and high to create a short pulse. This will generate the stop condition.
SCK SDI SDO PORTX ST9 MCU IM-BUS PROTOCOL
n
CLOCK DATA IDENT IM-BUS SLAVE DEVICE
VR001427
Figure 73. IM bus Timing
IDENT
CLOCK LINE
DATA LINE
LSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
MSB
LSB
1
2
3
4
5
6 MSB
VR000172
138/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.4.9 Register Description It is possible to have up to 3 independent SPIs in the same device (refer to the device block diagram). In this case they are named SPI0 thru SPI2. If the device has one SPI converter it uses the register adresses of SPI0. The register map is the following:
Register SPIDR R253 SPICR R254 SPIDR1 R253 SPICR1 R254 SPIDR2 R245 SPICR2 R246 SPIn SPI0 SPI0 SPI1 SPI1 SPI2 SPI2 Page 0 0 7 7 7 7
1: Both alternate functions SCK and SDO are enabled. Note: furthermore, SPEN (together with the BMS bit) affects the selection of the source for interrupt channel B0. Transmission starts when data is written to the SPIDR Register. Bit 6 = BMS: S-bus/I2C-bus Mode Selector. 0: Perform a re-initialisation of the SPI logic, thus allowing recovery procedures after a RX/TX failure. 1: Enable S-bus/I2C-bus arbitration, clock synchronization and Start/ Stop detection (SPI used in an S-bus/I2C-bus protocol). Note: when the BMS bit is reset, it affects (together with the SPEN bit) the selection of the source for interrupt channel B0. Bit 5 = ARB: Arbitration flag bit. This bit is set by hardware and can be reset by software. 0: S-bus/I2C-bus stop condition is detected. 1: Arbitration lost by the SPI in S-bus/I2C-bus mode. Note: when ARB is set automatically, the SDO pin is set to a high value until a write instruction on SPIDR is performed. Bit 4 = BUSY: SPI Busy Flag. This bit is set by hardware. It allows the user to monitor the SPI status by polling its value. 0: No transmission in progress. 1: Transmission in progress. Bit 3 = CPOL: Transmission Clock Polarity. CPOL controls the normal or steady state value of the clock when data is not being transferred. Please refer to the following table and to Figure 74 to see this bit action (together with the CPHA bit). Note: As the SCK line is held in a high impedance state when the SPI is disabled (SPEN = "0"), the SCK pin must be connected to VSS or to VCC through a resistor, depending on the CPOL state. Polarity should be set during the initialisation routine, in accordance with the setting of all peripherals, and should not be changed during program execution.
Note: In the register description on the following pages, register and page numbers are given using the example of SPI0. SPI DATA REGISTER (SPIDR) R253 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset Value: undefined
7 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 0 D0
Bit 7:0 = D[0:7]: SPI Data. This register contains the data transmitted and received by the SPI. Data is transmitted bit 7 first, and incoming data is received into bit 0. Transmission is started by writing to this register. Note: SPIDR state remains undefined until the end of transmission of the first byte. SPI CONTROL REGISTER (SPICR) R254 - Read/Write Register Page: 0 Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
SPEN BMS ARB BUSY CPOL CPHA SPR1
0
SPR0
Bit 7 = SPEN: Serial Peripheral Enable. 0: SCK and SDO are kept tristate.
139/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont'd) Bit 2 = CPHA: Transmission Clock Phase. CPHA controls the relationship between the data on the SDI and SDO pins, and the clock signal on the SCK pin. The CPHA bit selects the clock edge used to capture data. It has its greatest impact on the first bit transmitted (MSB), because it does (or does not) allow a clock transition before the first data capture edge. Figure 74 shows the relationship between CPHA, CPOL and SCK, and indicates active clock edges and strobe times.
CPOL 0 0 1 1 CPHA 0 1 0 1 SCK (in Figure 74) (a) (b) (c) (d)
Bit 1:0 = SPR[1:0]: SPI Rate. These two bits select one (of four) baud rates, to be used as SCK.
SPR1 SPR0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Clock Divider 8 16 128 256 SCK Frequency (@ INTCLK = 12MHz) 1500kHz 750kHz 93.75kHz 46.87kHz (T (T (T (T = 0.67s) = 1.33s) = 10.66s) = 21.33s)
Figure 74. SPI Data and Clock Timing
140/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
9.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI) 9.5.1 Introduction The Serial Communications Interface (SCI) offers full-duplex serial data exchange with a wide range of external equipment. The SCI offers four operating modes: Asynchronous, Asynchronous with synchronous clock, Serial expansion and Synchronous. The SCI offers the following principal features: s Full duplex synchronous and asynchronous operation. s Transmit, receive, line status, and device address interrupt generation. s Integral Baud Rate Generator capable of dividing the input clock by any value from 2 to 216-1 (16 bit word) and generating the internal 16X data sampling clock for asynchronous operation or the 1X clock for synchronous operation. s Fully programmable serial interface: - 5, 6, 7, or 8 bit word length. - Even, odd, or no parity generation and detection. - 0, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3 stop bit generation. - Complete status reporting capabilities. - Line break generation and detection. Figure 75. SCI Block Diagram
ST9 CORE BUS
s
s
s
s
Programmable address indication bit (wake-up bit) and user invisible compare logic to support multiple microcomputer networking. Optional character search function. Internal diagnostic capabilities: - Local loopback for communications link fault isolation. - Auto-echo for communications link fault isolation. Separate interrupt/DMA channels for transmit and receive. In addition, a Synchronous mode supports: - High speed communication - Possibility of hardware synchronization (RTS/ DCD signals). - Programmable polarity and stand-by level for data SIN/SOUT. - Programmable active edge and stand-by level for clocks CLKOUT/RXCL. - Programmable active levels of RTS/DCD signals. - Full Loop-Back and Auto-Echo modes for DATA, CLOCKs and CONTROLs.
DMA CONTROLLER
DMA CONTROLLER
TRANSMIT BUFFER REGISTER
ADDRESS COMPARE REGISTER
RECEIVER BUFFER REGISTER
TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER
Frame Control and STATUS
RECEIVER SHIFT REGISTER
CLOCK and BAUD RATE GENERATOR
ALTERNATE FUNCTION
SOUT RTS SDS TXCLK/CLKOUT RXCLK
DCD
SIN
VA00169A
141/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.2 Functional Description The SCI offers four operating modes: - Asynchronous mode - Asynchronous mode with synchronous clock - Serial expansion mode - Synchronous mode Figure 76. SCI Functional Schematic
Asynchronous mode, Asynchronous mode with synchronous clock and Serial expansion mode output data with the same serial frame format. The differences lie in the data sampling clock rates (1X, 16X) and in the protocol used.
INPL (*) INTCLK XBRG LBEN (*) Baud rate generator 1
RX buffer register RX shift register
polarity
RXclk
polarity
Sin
LBEN
Divider by 16
INPEN (*) OCKPL (*) stand by polarity OCLK XRX
0 CD 1 OUTPL (*)
stand by polarity
Divider by 16
0 CD
TX shift register TX buffer register Enveloper
Sout AEN
AEN (*)
DCDEN (*) OCLK XTCLK
OUTSB (*)
OCKSB (*)
Polarity
Polarity
AEN (*) RTSEN (*) VR02054
TXclk / CLKout
DCD
RTS
The control signals marked with (*) are active only in synchronous mode (SMEN=1) Note: Some pins may not be available on some devices. Refer to the device Pinout Description.
142/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.3 SCI Operating Modes 9.5.3.1 Asynchronous Mode In this mode, data and clock can be asynchronous (the transmitter and receiver can use their own clocks to sample received data), each data bit is sampled 16 times per clock period. The baud rate clock should be set to the /16 Mode and the frequency of the input clock (from an external source or from the internal baud-rate generator output) is set to suit.
9.5.3.2 Asynchronous Mode with Synchronous Clock In this mode, data and clock are synchronous, each data bit is sampled once per clock period. For transmit operation, a general purpose I/O port pin can be programmed to output the CLKOUT signal from the baud rate generator. If the SCI is provided with an external transmission clock source, there will be a skew equivalent to two INTCLK periods between clock and data. Data will be transmitted on the falling edge of the transmit clock. Received data will be latched into the SCI on the rising edge of the receive clock.
Figure 77. Sampling Times in Asynchronous Format
SDIN
rcvck 0 rxd 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
rxclk
VR001409
LEGEND: Serial Data Input line SIN: rcvck: Internal X16 Receiver Clock Internal Serial Data Input Line rxd: rxclk: Internal Receiver Shift Register Sampling Clock
143/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.3.3 Serial Expansion Mode This mode is used to communicate with an external synchronous peripheral. The transmitter only provides the clock waveform during the period that data is being transmitted on the CLKOUT pin (the Data Envelope). Data is latched on the rising edge of this clock. Whenever the SCI is to receive data in serial port expansion mode, the clock must be supplied externally, and be synchronous with the transmitted data. The SCI latches the incoming data on the rising edge of the received clock, which is input on the RXCLK pin. 9.5.3.4 Synchronous Mode This mode is used to access an external synchronous peripheral, dummy start/stop bits are not included in the data frame. Polarity, stand-by level and active edges of I/O signals are fully and separately programmable for both inputs and outputs. It's necessary to set the SMEN bit of the Synchronous Input Control Register (SICR) to enable this mode and all the related extra features (otherwise disabled). The transmitter will provide the clock waveform only during the period when the data is being transmitted via the CLKOUT pin, which can be enabled by setting both the XTCLK and OCLK bits of
the Clock Configuration Register. Whenever the SCI is to receive data in synchronous mode, the clock waveform must be supplied externally via the RXCLK pin and be synchronous with the data. For correct receiver operation, the XRX bit of the Clock Configuration Register must be set. Two external signals, Request-To-Send and DataCarrier-Detect (RTS/DCD), can be enabled to synchronise the data exchange between two serial units. The RTS output becomes active just before the first active edge of CLKOUT and indicates to the target device that the MCU is about to send a synchronous frame; it returns to its stand-by state following the last active edge of CLKOUT (MSB transmitted). The DCD input can be considered as a gate that filters RXCLK and informs the MCU that a transmitting device is transmitting a data frame. Polarity of RTS/DCD is individually programmable, as for clocks and data. The data word is programmable from 5 to 8 bits, as for the other modes; parity, address/9th, stop bits and break cannot be inserted into the transmitted frame. Programming of the related bits of the SCI control registers is irrelevant in Synchronous Mode: all the corresponding interrupt requests must, in any case, be masked in order to avoid incorrect operation during data reception.
144/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) Figure 78. SCI Operating Modes
I/O
START BIT
DATA 16
PARITY STOP BIT 16
I/O
DATA
PARITY STOP BIT
16 CLOCK
START BIT CLOCK
VA00271
VA00272
Asynchronous Mode
Asynchronous Mode with Synchronous Clock
I/O START BIT (Dummy) CLOCK
DATA STOP BIT (Dummy)
stand-by
DATA
stand-by
stand-by
CLOCK
stand-by
stand-by VA0273A
RTS/DCD
stand-by
VR02051
Serial Expansion Mode
Synchronous Mode
Note: In all operating modes, the Least Significant Bit is transmitted/received first.
145/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.4 Serial Frame Format Characters sent or received by the SCI can have some or all of the features in the following format, depending on the operating mode: START: the START bit indicates the beginning of a data frame in Asynchronous modes. The START condition is detected as a high to low transition. A dummy START bit is generated in Serial Expansion mode. The START bit is not generated in Synchronous mode. DATA: the DATA word length is programmable from 5 to 8 bits, for both Synchronous and Asynchronous modes. LSB are transmitted first. PARITY: The Parity Bit (not available in Serial Expansion mode and Synchronous mode) is optional, and can be used with any word length. It is used for error checking and is set so as to make the total number of high bits in DATA plus PARITY odd or even, depending on the number of "1"s in the DATA field. ADDRESS/9TH: The Address/9th Bit is optional and may be added to any word format. It is used in Figure 79. SCI Character Formats
both Serial Expansion and Asynchronous modes to indicate that the data is an address (bit set). The ADDRESS/9TH bit is useful when several microcontrollers are exchanging data on the same serial bus. Individual microcontrollers can stay idle on the serial bus, waiting for a transmitted address. When a microcontroller recognizes its own address, it can begin Data Reception, likewise, on the transmit side, the microcontroller can transmit another address to begin communication with a different microcontroller. The ADDRESS/9TH bit can be used as an additional data bit or to mark control words (9th bit). STOP: Indicates the end of a data frame in Asynchronous modes. A dummy STOP bit is generated in Serial Expansion mode. The STOP bit can be programmed to be 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 or 3 bits long, depending on the mode. It returns the SCI to the quiescent marking state (i.e., a constant high-state condition) which lasts until a new start bit indicates an incoming word. The STOP bit is not generated in Synchronous mode.
START(2) # bits 1
DATA (1) 5, 6, 7, 8
PARITY (3) 0, 1 NONE ODD EVEN
ADDRESS (2) 0, 1 ON OFF
STOP (2) 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 1, 2, 3 16X 1X
states
(1) (2)
LSB First Not available in Synchronous mode (3) Not available in Serial Expansion mode and Synchronous mode
146/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.4.1 Data transfer Data to be transmitted by the SCI is first loaded by the program into the Transmitter Buffer Register. The SCI will transfer the data into the Transmitter Shift Register when the Shift Register becomes available (empty). The Transmitter Shift Register converts the parallel data into serial format for transmission via the SCI Alternate Function output, Serial Data Out. On completion of the transfer, the transmitter buffer register interrupt pending bit will be updated. If the selected word length is less than 8 bits, the unused most significant bits do not need to be defined. Incoming serial data from the Serial Data Input pin is converted into parallel format by the Receiver Shift Register. At the end of the input data frame, the valid data portion of the received word is transferred from the Receiver Shift Register into the Receiver Buffer Register. All Receiver interrupt conditions are updated at the time of transfer. If the selected character format is less than 8 bits, the unused most significant bits will be set. The Frame Control and Status block creates and checks the character configuration (Data length and number of Stop bits), as well as the source of the transmitter/receiver clock. The internal Baud Rate Generator contains a programmable divide by "N" counter which can be used to generate the clocks for the transmitter and/or receiver. The baud rate generator can use INTCLK or the Receiver clock input via RXCLK. The Address bit/D9 is optional and may be added to any word in Asynchronous and Serial Expansion modes. It is commonly used in network or machine control applications. When enabled (AB set), an address or ninth data bit can be added to a transmitted word by setting the Set Address bit (SA). This is then appended to the next word entered into the (empty) Transmitter Buffer Register and then cleared by hardware. On character input, a set Address Bit can indicate that the data preceding the bit is an address which may be compared in hardware with the value in the Address Compare Register (ACR) to generate an Address Match interrupt when equal. The Address bit and Address Comparison Register can also be combined to generate four different types of Address Interrupt to suit different protocols, based on the status of the Address Mode Enable bit (AMEN) and the Address Mode bit (AM) in the CHCR register.
The character match Address Interrupt mode may be used as a powerful character search mode, generating an interrupt on reception of a predetermined character e.g. Carriage Return or End of Block codes (Character Match Interrupt). This is the only Address Interrupt Mode available in Synchronous mode. The Line Break condition is fully supported for both transmission and reception. Line Break is sent by setting the SB bit (IDPR). This causes the transmitter output to be held low (after all buffered data has been transmitted) for a minimum of one complete word length and until the SB bit is Reset. Break cannot be inserted into the transmitted frame for the Synchronous mode. Testing of the communications channel may be performed using the built-in facilities of the SCI peripheral. Auto-Echo mode and Loop-Back mode may be used individually or together. In Asynchronous, Asynchronous with Synchronous Clock and Serial Expansion modes they are available only on SIN/SOUT pins through the programming of AEN/ LBEN bits in CCR. In Synchronous mode (SMEN set) the above configurations are available on SIN/ SOUT, RXCLK/CLKOUT and DCD/RTS pins by programming the AEN/LBEN bits and independently of the programmed polarity. In the Synchronous mode case, when AEN is set, the transmitter outputs (data, clock and control) are disconnected from the I/O pins, which are driven directly by the receiver input pins (Auto-Echo mode: SOUT=SIN, CLKOUT=RXCLK and RTS=DCD, even if they act on the internal receiver with the programmed polarity/edge). When LBEN is set, the receiver inputs (data, clock and controls) are disconnected and the transmitter outputs are looped-back into the receiver section (Loop-Back mode: SIN=SOUT, RXCLK=CLKOUT, DCD=RTS. The output pins are locked to their programmed stand-by level and the status of the INPL, XCKPL, DCDPL, OUTPL, OCKPL and RTSPL bits in the SICR register are irrelevant). Refer to Figure 80, Figure 81, and Figure 82 for these different configurations. Table 27. Address Interrupt Modes
If 9th Data Bit is set (1) If Character Match If Character Match and 9th Data Bit is set(1) If Character Match Immediately Follows BREAK (1)
(1)
Not available in Synchronous mode
147/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) Figure 80. Auto Echo Configuration
DCD TRANSMITTE R SOUT RTS TRANS MITTER SOUT
RXCLK RECEIVER SIN CLKOUT
VR000210
RECEIVER
SIN
VR00210A
All modes except Synchronous Figure 81. Loop Back Configuration
Synchronous mode (SMEN=1)
DCD TRANSMITT ER LOGICAL 1 SOUT RTS stand-by value clock RECEIVER RXCLK SIN CLKOUT
VR000211
TRANSMIT TER
stand-by value data
SOUT
RECEIVER stand-by value
SIN
VR00211A
All modes except Synchronous Figure 82. Auto Echo and Loop-Back Configuration
Synchronous mode (SMEN=1)
DCD TRANSMI TTER SOUT RTS TRANSMIT TER SOUT
clock
RECEIVE R SIN
VR000212
data
RECEIVER SIN
VR00212A
RXCLK CLKOUT
All modes except Synchronous
Synchronous mode (SMEN=1)
148/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.5 Clocks And Serial Transmission Rates The communication bit rate of the SCI transmitter and receiver sections can be provided from the internal Baud Rate Generator or from external sources. The bit rate clock is divided by 16 in Asynchronous mode (CD in CCR reset), or undivided in the 3 other modes (CD set). With INTCLK running at 24MHz and no external Clock provided, a maximum bit rate of 3MBaud and 750KBaud is available in undivided and divide by-16-mode respectively. With INTCLK running at 24MHz and an external Clock provided through the RXCLK/TXCLK lines, a maximum bit rate of 3MBaud and 375KBaud is avaiable in undivided and divided by 16 mode respectively (see Figure 10 "Receiver and Transmitter Clock Frequencies")" External Clock Sources. The External Clock input pin TXCLK may be programmed by the XTCLK and OCLK bits in the CCR register as: the transmit clock input, Baud Rate Generator output (allowing an external divider circuit to provide the receive clock for split rate transmit and receive), or as CLKOUT output in Synchronous and Serial Expansion modes. The RXCLK Receive clock input is enabled by the XRX bit, this input should be set in accordance with the setting of the CD bit. Baud Rate Generator. The internal Baud Rate Generator consists of a 16-bit programmable divide by "N" counter which can be used to generate the transmitter and/or receiver clocks. The minimum baud rate divisor is 2 and the maximum divisor is 216-1. After initialising the baud rate generator, the divisor value is immediately loaded into the counter. This prevents potentially long random counts on the initial load. The Baud Rate generator frequency is equal to the Input Clock frequency divided by the Divisor value. WARNING: Programming the baud rate divider to 0 or 1 will stop the divider.
The output of the Baud Rate generator has a precise 50% duty cycle. The Baud Rate generator can use INTCLK for the input clock source. In this case, INTCLK (and therefore the MCU Xtal) should be chosen to provide a suitable frequency for division by the Baud Rate Generator to give the required transmit and receive bit rates. Suitable INTCLK frequencies and the respective divider values for standard Baud rates are shown in Table 28. 9.5.6 SCI Initialization Procedure Writing to either of the two Baud Rate Generator Registers immediately disables and resets the SCI baud rate generator, as well as the transmitter and receiver circuitry. After writing to the second Baud Rate Generator Register, the transmitter and receiver circuits are enabled. The Baud Rate Generator will load the new value and start counting. To initialize the SCI, the user should first initialize the most significant byte of the Baud Rate Generator Register; this will reset all SCI circuitry. The user should then initialize all other SCI registers (SICR/SOCR included) for the desired operating mode and then, to enable the SCI, he should initialize the least significant byte Baud Rate Generator Register. 'On-the-Fly' modifications of the control registers' content during transmitter/receiver operations, although possible, can corrupt data and produce undesirable spikes on the I/O lines (data, clock and control). Furthermore, modifying the control registers' content without reinitialising the SCI circuitry (during stand-by cycles, waiting to transmit or receive data) must be kept carefully under control by software to avoid spurious data being transmitted or received. Note: For synchronous receive operation, the data and receive clock must not exhibit significant skew between clock and data. The received data and clock are internally synchronized to INTCLK.
Figure 83. SCI Baud Rate Generator Initialization Sequence
MOST SIGNIFICANT BYTE INITIALIZATIO N
SELECT SCI WORKING MODE
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BYTE INITIALIZATIO N
149/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) Table 28. SCI Baud Rate Generator Divider Values Example 1
INTCLK: 19660.800 KHz Baud Rate 50.00 75.00 110.00 300.00 600.00 1200.00 2400.00 4800.00 9600.00 19200.00 38400.00 76800.00 Clock Factor 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X Desired Freq (kHz) 0.80000 1.20000 1.76000 4.80000 9.60000 19.20000 38.40000 76.80000 153.60000 307.20000 614.40000 1228.80000 Divisor Dec 24576 16384 11170 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 Hex 6000 4000 2BA2 1000 800 400 200 100 80 40 20 10 Actual Baud Rate 50.00 75.00 110.01 300.00 600.00 1200.00 2400.00 4800.00 9600.00 19200.00 38400.00 76800.00 Actual Freq (kHz) 0.80000 1.20000 1.76014 4.80000 9.60000 19.20000 38.40000 76.80000 153.60000 307.20000 614.40000 1228.80000 Deviation 0.0000% 0.0000% -0.00081% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
Table 29. SCI Baud Rate Generator Divider Values Example 2
INTCLK: 24576 KHz Baud Rate 50.00 75.00 110.00 300.00 600.00 1200.00 2400.00 4800.00 9600.00 19200.00 38400.00 76800.00 Clock Factor 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X 16 X Desired Freq (kHz) 0.80000 1.20000 1.76000 4.80000 9.60000 19.20000 38.40000 76.80000 153.60000 307.20000 614.40000 1228.80000 Divisor Dec 30720 20480 13963 5120 2560 1280 640 320 160 80 40 20 Hex 7800 5000 383B 1400 A00 500 280 140 A0 50 28 14 Actual Baud Rate 50.00 75.00 110.01 300.00 600.00 1200.00 2400.00 4800.00 9600.00 19200.00 38400.00 76800.00 Actual Freq (kHz) 0.80000 1.20000 1.76014 4.80000 9.60000 19.20000 38.40000 76.80000 153.60000 307.20000 614.40000 1228.80000 Deviation 0.0000% 0.0000% -0.00046% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
150/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.7 Input Signals SIN: Serial Data Input. This pin is the serial data input to the SCI receiver shift register. TXCLK: External Transmitter Clock Input. This pin is the external input clock driving the SCI transmitter. The TXCLK frequency must be greater than or equal to 16 times the transmitter data rate (depending whether the X16 or the X1 clock have been selected). A 50% duty cycle is required for this input and must have a period of at least twice INTCLK. The use of the TXCLK pin is optional. RXCLK: External Receiver Clock Input. This input is the clock to the SCI receiver when using an external clock source connected to the baud rate generator. INTCLK is normally the clock source. A 50% duty cycle is required for this input and must have a period of at least twice INTCLK. Use of RXCLK is optional. DCD: Data Carrier Detect. This input is enabled only in Synchronous mode; it works as a gate for the RXCLK clock and informs the MCU that an emitting device is transmitting a synchronous frame. The active level can be programmed as 1 or 0 and must be provided at least one INTCLK period before the first active edge of the input clock. 9.5.8 Output Signals SOUT: Serial Data Output. This Alternate Function output signal is the serial data output for the SCI transmitter in all operating modes. CLKOUT: Clock Output. The alternate Function of this pin outputs either the data clock from the transmitter in Serial Expansion or Synchronous modes, or the clock output from the Baud Rate Generator. In Serial expansion mode it will clock
only the data portion of the frame and its stand-by state is high: data is valid on the rising edge of the clock. Even in Synchronous mode CLKOUT will only clock the data portion of the frame, but the stand-by level and active edge polarity are programmable by the user. When Synchronous mode is disabled (SMEN in SICR is reset), the state of the XTCLK and OCLK bits in CCR determine the source of CLKOUT; '11' enables the Serial Expansion Mode. When the Synchronous mode is enabled (SMEN in SICR is set), the state of the XTCLK and OCLK bits in CCR determine the source of CLKOUT; '00' disables it for PLM applications. RTS: Request To Send. This output Alternate Function is only enabled in Synchronous mode; it becomes active when the Least Significant Bit of the data frame is sent to the Serial Output Pin (SOUT) and indicates to the target device that the MCU is about to send a synchronous frame; it returns to its stand-by value just after the last active edge of CLKOUT (MSB transmitted). The active level can be programmed high or low. SDS: Synchronous Data Strobe. This output Alternate function is only enabled in Synchronous mode; it becomes active high when the Least Significant Bit is sent to the Serial Output Pins (SOUT) and indicates to the target device that the MCU is about to send the first bit for each synchronous frame. It is active high on the first bit and it is low for all the rest of the frame. The active level can not be programmed.
Figure 84. Receiver and Transmitter Clock Frequencies
Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max INTCLK/8 INTCLK/4 INTCLK/8 INTCLK/2 INTCLK/8 INTCLK/4 INTCLK/8 INTCLK/2 Conditions 1x mode 16x mode 1x mode 16x mode 1x mode 16x mode 1x mode 16x mode
External RXCLK Receiver Clock Frequency Internal Receiver Clock External TXCLK Transmitter Clock Frequency Internal Transmitter Clock
Note: The internal receiver and transmitter clocks are the ones applied to the Tx and Rx shift registers (see Figure 75).
151/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.9 Interrupts and DMA 9.5.9.1 Interrupts The SCI can generate interrupts as a result of several conditions. Receiver interrupts include data pending, receive errors (overrun, framing and parity), as well as address or break pending. Transmitter interrupts are software selectable for either Transmit Buffer Register Empty (BSN set) or for Transmit Shift Register Empty (BSN reset) conditions. Typical usage of the Interrupts generated by the SCI peripheral are illustrated in Figure 85. The SCI peripheral is able to generate interrupt requests as a result of a number of events, several of which share the same interrupt vector. It is therefore necessary to poll S_ISR, the Interrupt Status Register, in order to determine the active
trigger. These bits should be reset by the programmer during the Interrupt Service routine. The four major levels of interrupt are encoded in hardware to provide two bits of the interrupt vector register, allowing the position of the block of pointer vectors to be resolved to an 8 byte block size. The SCI interrupts have an internal priority structure in order to resolve simultaneous events. Refer also to Section 9.5.3 SCI Operating Modes for more details relating to Synchronous mode. Table 30. SCI Interrupt Internal Priority
Receive DMA Request Transmit DMA Request Receive Interrupt Transmit Interrupt Lowest Priority Highest Priority
152/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) Table 31. SCI Interrupt Vectors
Interrupt Source Transmitter Buffer or Shift Register Empty Transmit DMA end of Block Received Data Pending Receive DMA end of Block Break Detector Address Word Match Receiver Error Vector Address xxx x110 xxxx x100 xxxx x010 xxxx x000
Figure 85. SCI Interrupts: Example of Typical Usage
ADDRESS AFTER BREAK CONDITION DATA BREAK ADDRESS MATCH DATA DATA DATA BREAK ADDRESS NO MATCH DATA
BREAK INTERRUPT ADDRESS INTERRUPT ADDRESS WORD MARKED BY D9=1 DATA ADDRESS MATCH DATA
DATA INTERRUPT
DATA INTERRUPT
DATA INTERRUPT
BREAK INTERRUPT
DATA
DATA
ADDRESS NO MATCH
DATA
ADDRESS INTERRUPT
DATA INTERRUPT DATA DATA INTERRUPT INTERRUPT
CHARACTER SEARCH MODE DATA DATA MATCH DATA DATA DATA
DATA INTERRUPT
DATA CHAR MATCH INTERRUPT DATA INTERRUPT DATA DATA INTERRUPT INTERRUPT INTERRUPT
D9 ACTING AS DATA CONTROL WITH SEPARATE INTERRUPT DATA DATA D9=1 DATA DATA DATA
DATA INTERRUPT
DATA D9=1 DATA INTERRUPT DATA INTERRUPT DATA INTERRUPT INTERRUPT INTERRUPT
VA00270
153/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.9.2 DMA Two DMA channels are associated with the SCI, for transmit and for receive. These follow the register scheme as described in the DMA chapter. DMA Reception To perform a DMA transfer in reception mode: 1. Initialize the DMA counter (RDCPR) and DMA address (RDAPR) registers 2. Enable DMA by setting the RXD bit in the IDPR register. 3. DMA transfer is started when data is received by the SCI. DMA Transmission To perform a DMA transfer in transmission mode: 1. Initialize the DMA counter (TDCPR) and DMA address (TDAPR) registers. 2. Enable DMA by setting the TXD bit in the IDPR register. 3. DMA transfer is started by writing a byte in the Transmitter Buffer register (TXBR). If this byte is the first data byte to be transmitted, the DMA counter and address registers must be initialized to begin DMA transmission at the second byte. Alternatively, DMA transfer can be started by writing a dummy byte in the TXBR register. DMA Interrupts When DMA is active, the Received Data Pending and the Transmitter Shift Register Empty interrupt sources are replaced by the DMA End Of Block receive and transmit interrupt sources. Note: To handle DMA transfer correctly in transmission, the BSN bit in the IMR register must be cleared. This selects the Transmitter Shift Register Empty event as the DMA interrupt source.
The transfer of the last byte of a DMA data block will be followed by a DMA End Of Block transmit or receive interrupt, setting the TXEOB or RXEOB bit. A typical Transmission End Of Block interrupt routine will perform the following actions: 1. Restore the DMA counter register (TDCPR). 2. Restore the DMA address register (TDAPR). 3. Clear the Transmitter Shift Register Empty bit TXSEM in the S_ISR register to avoid spurious interrupts. 4. Clear the Transmitter End Of Block (TXEOB) pending bit in the IMR register. 5. Set the TXD bit in the IDPR register to enable DMA. 6. Load the Transmitter Buffer Register (TXBR) with the next byte to transmit. The above procedure handles the case where a further DMA transfer is to be performed. Error Interrupt Handling If an error interrupt occurs while DMA is enabled in reception mode, DMA transfer is stopped. To resume DMA transfer, the error interrupt handling routine must clear the corresponding error flag. In the case of an Overrun error, the routine must also read the RXBR register. Character Search Mode with DMA In Character Search Mode with DMA, when a character match occurs, this character is not transferred. DMA continues with the next received character. To avoid an Overrun error occurring, the Character Match interrupt service routine must read the RXBR register.
154/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) 9.5.10 Register Description The SCI registers are located in the following pages in the ST9: SCI number 0: page 24 (18h) SCI number 1: page 25 (19h) (when present) The SCI is controlled by the following registers:
Address R240 (F0h) R241 (F1h) R242 (F2h) R243 (F3h) R244 (F4h) R245 (F5h) R246 (F6h) R247 (F7h) R248 (F8h) R248 (F8h) R249 (F9h) R250 (FAh) R251 (FBh) R252 (FCh) R253 (FDh) R254 (FEh) R255 (FFh) Register Receiver DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register Receiver DMA Source Address Pointer Register Transmitter DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register Transmitter DMA Destination Address Pointer Register Interrupt Vector Register Address Compare Register Interrupt Mask Register Interrupt Status Register Receive Buffer Register same Address as Transmitter Buffer Register (Read Only) Transmitter Buffer Register same Address as Receive Buffer Register (Write only) Interrupt/DMA Priority Register Character Configuration Register Clock Configuration Register Baud Rate Generator High Register Baud Rate Generator Low Register Synchronous Input Control Register Synchronous Output Control Register
155/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) RECEIVER DMA COUNTER POINTER (RDCPR) TRANSMITTER DMA COUNTER POINTER (TDCPR) R240 - Read/Write R242 - Read/Write Reset value: undefined Reset value: undefined
7 0 RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RR/M 7 TC7 TC6 TC5 TC4 TC3 TC2 TC1 0 TR/M
Bit 7:1 = RC[7:1]: Receiver DMA Counter Pointer. These bits contain the address of the receiver DMA transaction counter in the Register File. Bit 0 = RR/M: Receiver Register File/Memory Selector. 0: Select Memory space as destination. 1: Select the Register File as destination. RECEIVER DMA ADDRESS POINTER (RDAPR) R241 - Read/Write Reset value: undefined
7 RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 0 RPS
Bit 7:1 = TC[7:1]: Transmitter DMA Counter Pointer. These bits contain the address of the transmitter DMA transaction counter in the Register File. Bit 0 = TR/M: Transmitter Register File/Memory Selector. 0: Select Memory space as source. 1: Select the Register File as source. TRANSMITTER DMA ADDRESS POINTER (TDAPR) R243 - Read/Write Reset value: undefined
7 0 TA6 TA5 TA4 TA3 TA2 TA1 TPS
Bit 7:1 = RA[7:1]: Receiver DMA Address Pointer. These bits contain the address of the pointer (in the Register File) of the receiver DMA data source. Bit 0 = RPS: Receiver DMA Memory Pointer Selector. This bit is only significant if memory has been selected for DMA transfers (RR/M = 0 in the RDCPR register). 0: Select ISR register for receiver DMA transfers address extension. 1: Select DMASR register for receiver DMA transfers address extension.
TA7
Bit 7:1 = TA[7:1]: Transmitter DMA Address Pointer. These bits contain the address of the pointer (in the Register File) of the transmitter DMA data source. Bit 0 = TPS: Transmitter DMA Memory Pointer Selector. This bit is only significant if memory has been selected for DMA transfers (TR/M = 0 in the TDCPR register). 0: Select ISR register for transmitter DMA transfers address extension. 1: Select DMASR register for transmitter DMA transfers address extension.
156/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (S_IVR) ADDRESS/DATA COMPARE REGISTER (ACR) R244 - Read/Write R245 - Read/Write Reset value: undefined Reset value: undefined
7 V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 EV2 EV1 0 0 7 AC7 AC6 AC5 AC4 AC3 AC2 AC1 0 AC0
Bit 7:3 = V[7:3]: SCI Interrupt Vector Base Address. User programmable interrupt vector bits for transmitter and receiver. Bit 2:1 = EV[2:1]: Encoded Interrupt Source. Both bits EV2 and EV1 are read only and set by hardware according to the interrupt source.
EV2 EV1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Interrupt source Receiver Error (Overrun, Framing, Parity) Break Detect or Address Match Received Data Pending/Receiver DMA End of Block Transmitter buffer or shift register empty transmitter DMA End of Block
Bit 7:0 = AC[7:0]: Address/Compare Character. With either 9th bit address mode, address after break mode, or character search, the received address will be compared to the value stored in this register. When a valid address matches this register content, the Receiver Address Pending bit (RXAP in the S_ISR register) is set. After the RXAP bit is set in an addressed mode, all received data words will be transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register.
Bit 0 = D0: This bit is forced by hardware to 0.
157/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) Bit 4 = RXE: Receiver Error Mask. INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR) 0: Disable Receiver error interrupts (OE, PE, and R246 - Read/Write FE pending bits in the S_ISR register). Reset value: 0xx00000 1: Enable Receiver error interrupts.
7 BSN RXEOB TXEOB RXE RXA RXB RXDI 0 TXDI
Bit 7 = BSN: Buffer or shift register empty interrupt. This bit selects the source of the transmitter register empty interrupt. 0: Select a Shift Register Empty as source of a Transmitter Register Empty interrupt. 1: Select a Buffer Register Empty as source of a Transmitter Register Empty interrupt. Bit 6 = RXEOB: Received End of Block. This bit is set by hardware only and must be reset by software. RXEOB is set after a receiver DMA cycle to mark the end of a data block. 0: Clear the interrupt request. 1: Mark the end of a received block of data. Bit 5 = TXEOB: Transmitter End of Block. This bit is set by hardware only and must be reset by software. TXEOB is set after a transmitter DMA cycle to mark the end of a data block. 0: Clear the interrupt request. 1: Mark the end of a transmitted block of data.
Bit 3 = RXA: Receiver Address Mask. 0: Disable Receiver Address interrupt (RXAP pending bit in the S_ISR register). 1: Enable Receiver Address interrupt. Bit 2 = RXB: Receiver Break Mask. 0: Disable Receiver Break interrupt (RXBP pending bit in the S_ISR register). 1: Enable Receiver Break interrupt. Bit 1 = RXDI: Receiver Data Interrupt Mask. 0: Disable Receiver Data Pending and Receiver End of Block interrupts (RXDP and RXEOB pending bits in the S_ISR register). 1: Enable Receiver Data Pending and Receiver End of Block interrupts. Note: RXDI has no effect on DMA transfers. Bit 0 = TXDI: Transmitter Data Interrupt Mask. 0: Disable Transmitter Buffer Register Empty, Transmitter Shift Register Empty, or Transmitter End of Block interrupts (TXBEM, TXSEM, and TXEOB bits in the S_ISR register). 1: Enable Transmitter Buffer Register Empty, Transmitter Shift Register Empty, or Transmitter End of Block interrupts. Note: TXDI has no effect on DMA transfers.
158/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) Note: The source of this interrupt is given by the INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER (S_ISR) couple of bits (AMEN, AM) as detailed in the IDPR R247 - Read/Write register description. Reset value: undefined
7 OE FE PE RXAP RXBP RXDP 0 TXBE M TXSEM
Bit 7 = OE: Overrun Error Pending. This bit is set by hardware if the data in the Receiver Buffer Register was not read by the CPU before the next character was transferred into the Receiver Buffer Register (the previous data is lost). 0: No Overrun Error. 1: Overrun Error occurred. Bit 6 = FE: Framing Error Pending bit. This bit is set by hardware if the received data word did not have a valid stop bit. 0: No Framing Error. 1: Framing Error occurred. Note: In the case where a framing error occurs when the SCI is programmed in address mode and is monitoring an address, the interrupt is asserted and the corrupted data element is transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register. Bit 5 = PE: Parity Error Pending. This bit is set by hardware if the received word did not have the correct even or odd parity bit. 0: No Parity Error. 1: Parity Error occurred. Bit 4 = RXAP: Receiver Address Pending. RXAP is set by hardware after an interrupt acknowledged in the address mode. 0: No interrupt in address mode. 1: Interrupt in address mode occurred.
Bit 3 = RXBP: Receiver Break Pending bit. This bit is set by hardware if the received data input is held low for the full word transmission time (start bit, data bits, parity bit, stop bit). 0: No break received. 1: Break event occurred. Bit 2 = RXDP: Receiver Data Pending bit. This bit is set by hardware when data is loaded into the Receiver Buffer Register. 0: No data received. 1: Data received in Receiver Buffer Register. Bit 1 = TXBEM: Transmitter Buffer Register Empty. This bit is set by hardware if the Buffer Register is empty. 0: No Buffer Register Empty event. 1: Buffer Register Empty. Bit 0 = TXSEM: Transmitter Shift Register Empty. This bit is set by hardware if the Shift Register has completed the transmission of the available data. 0: No Shift Register Empty event. 1: Shift Register Empty. Note: The Interrupt Status Register bits can be reset but cannot be set by the user. The interrupt source must be cleared by resetting the related bit when executing the interrupt service routine (naturally the other pending bits should not be reset).
159/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) TRANSMITTER BUFFER REGISTER (TXBR) RECEIVER BUFFER REGISTER (RXBR) R248 - Write only R248 - Read only Reset value: undefined Reset value: undefined
7 RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 0 RD0 7 TD7 TD6 TD5 TD4 TD3 TD2 TD1 0 TD0
Bit 7:0 = RD[7:0]: Received Data. This register stores the data portion of the received word. The data will be transferred from the Receiver Shift Register into the Receiver Buffer Register at the end of the word. All receiver interrupt conditions will be updated at the time of transfer. If the selected character format is less than 8 bits, unused most significant bits will forced to "1". Note: RXBR and TXBR are two physically different registers located at the same address.
Bit 7:0 = TD[7:0]: Transmit Data. The ST9 core will load the data for transmission into this register. The SCI will transfer the data from the buffer into the Shift Register when available. At the transfer, the Transmitter Buffer Register interrupt is updated. If the selected word format is less than 8 bits, the unused most significant bits are not significant. Note: TXBR and RXBR are two physically different registers located at the same address.
160/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) INTERRUPT/DMA PRIORITY REGISTER (IDPR) R249 - Read/Write Reset value: undefined
7 AMEN SB SA RXD TXD PRL2 PRL1 0 PRL0
mat. If software does not reset SB before the minimum break length has finished, the break condition will continue until software resets SB. The SCI terminates the break condition with a high level on the transmitter data output for one transmission clock period. Bit 5 = SA: Set Address. If an address/9th data bit mode is selected, SA value will be loaded for transmission into the Shift Register. This bit is cleared by hardware after its load. 0: Indicate it is not an address word. 1: Indicate an address word. Note: Proper procedure would be, when the Transmitter Buffer Register is empty, to load the value of SA and then load the data into the Transmitter Buffer Register. Bit 4 = RXD: Receiver DMA Mask. This bit is reset by hardware when the transaction counter value decrements to zero. At that time a receiver End of Block interrupt can occur. 0: Disable Receiver DMA request (the RXDP bit in the S_ISR register can request an interrupt). 1: Enable Receiver DMA request (the RXDP bit in the S_ISR register can request a DMA transfer). Bit 3 = TXD: Transmitter DMA Mask. This bit is reset by hardware when the transaction counter value decrements to zero. At that time a transmitter End Of Block interrupt can occur. 0: Disable Transmitter DMA request (TXBEM or TXSEM bits in S_ISR can request an interrupt). 1: Enable Transmitter DMA request (TXBEM or TXSEM bits in S_ISR can request a DMA transfer). Bit 2:0 = PRL[2:0]: SCI Interrupt/DMA Priority bits. The priority for the SCI is encoded with (PRL2,PRL1,PRL0). Priority level 0 is the highest, while level 7 represents no priority. When the user has defined a priority level for the SCI, priorities within the SCI are hardware defined. These SCI internal priorities are:
Receiver DMA request Transmitter DMA request Receiver interrupt Transmitter interrupt highest priority
Bit 7 = AMEN: Address Mode Enable. This bit, together with the AM bit (in the CHCR register), decodes the desired addressing/9th data bit/character match operation. In Address mode the SCI monitors the input serial data until its address is detected
AMEN 0 0 1 1 AM 0 1 0 1 Address interrupt if 9th data bit = 1 Address interrupt if character match Address interrupt if character match and 9th data bit =1 Address interrupt if character match with word immediately following Break
Note: Upon reception of address, the RXAP bit (in the Interrupt Status Register) is set and an interrupt cycle can begin. The address character will not be transferred into the Receiver Buffer Register but all data following the matched SCI address and preceding the next address word will be transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register and the proper interrupts updated. If the address does not match, all data following this unmatched address will not be transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register. In any of the cases the RXAP bit must be reset by software before the next word is transferred into the Buffer Register. When AMEN is reset and AM is set, a useful character search function is performed. This allows the SCI to generate an interrupt whenever a specific character is encountered (e.g. Carriage Return). Bit 6 = SB: Set Break. 0: Stop the break transmission after minimum break length. 1: Transmit a break following the transmission of all data in the Transmitter Shift Register and the Buffer Register. Note: The break will be a low level on the transmitter data output for at least one complete word for-
lowest priority
161/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) CHARACTER CONFIGURATION REGISTER (CHCR) Bit 4 = AB: Address/9th Bit. 0: No Address/9th bit. R250 - Read/Write 1: Address/9th bit included in the character format Reset value: undefined between the parity bit and the first stop bit. This 7 0 bit can be used to address the SCI or as a ninth data bit.
AM EP PEN AB SB1 SB0 WL1 WL0
Bit 3:2 = SB[1:0]: Number of Stop Bits.. Bit 7 = AM: Address Mode. This bit, together with the AMEN bit (in the IDPR register), decodes the desired addressing/9th data bit/character match operation. Please refer to the table in the IDPR register description. Bit 6 = EP: Even Parity. 0: Select odd parity (when parity is enabled). 1: Select even parity (when parity is enabled). Bit 5 = PEN: Parity Enable. 0: No parity bit. 1: Parity bit generated (transmit data) or checked (received data). Note: If the address/9th bit is enabled, the parity bit will precede the address/9th bit (the 9th bit is never included in the parity calculation).
SB1 0 0 1 1 SB0 0 1 0 1 Number of stop bits in 16X mode in 1X mode 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 2.5 3
Bit 1:0 = WL[1:0]: Number of Data Bits
WL1 0 0 1 1 WL0 0 1 0 1 Data Length 5 bits 6 bits 7 bits 8 bits
162/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) CLOCK CONFIGURATION REGISTER (CCR) 0: Select 16X clock mode for both receiver and transmitter. R251 - Read/Write 1: Select 1X clock mode for both receiver and Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h) transmitter. 7 0 Note: In 1X clock mode, the transmitter will transmit data at one data bit per clock period. In 16X XTCLK OCLK XRX XBRG CD AEN LBEN STPE N mode each data bit period will be 16 clock periods long. Bit 7 = XTCLK This bit, together with the OCLK bit, selects the Bit 2 = AEN: Auto Echo Enable. source for the transmitter clock. The following ta0: No auto echo mode. ble shows the coding of XTCLK and OCLK. 1: Put the SCI in auto echo mode. Bit 6 = OCLK This bit, together with the XTCLK bit, selects the source for the transmitter clock. The following table shows the coding of XTCLK and OCLK.
XTCLK 0 0 1 OCLK 0 1 0 Pin Function Pin is used as a general I/O Pin = TXCLK (used as an input) Pin = CLKOUT (outputs the Baud Rate Generator clock) Pin = CLKOUT (outputs the Serial expansion and synchronous mode clock)
Note: Auto Echo mode has the following effect: the SCI transmitter is disconnected from the dataout pin SOUT, which is driven directly by the receiver data-in pin, SIN. The receiver remains connected to SIN and is operational, unless loopback mode is also selected. Bit 1 = LBEN: Loopback Enable. 0: No loopback mode. 1: Put the SCI in loopback mode. Note: In this mode, the transmitter output is set to a high level, the receiver input is disconnected, and the output of the Transmitter Shift Register is looped back into the Receiver Shift Register input. All interrupt sources (transmitter and receiver) are operational. Bit 0 = STPEN: Stick Parity Enable. 0: The transmitter and the receiver will follow the parity of even parity bit EP in the CHCR register. 1: The transmitter and the receiver will use the opposite parity type selected by the even parity bit EP in the CHCR register.
EP SPEN 0 0 1 1 Parity (Transmitter & Receiver) Odd Even Even Odd
1
1
Bit 5 = XRX: External Receiver Clock Source. 0: External receiver clock source not used. 1: Select the external receiver clock source. Note: The external receiver clock frequency must be 16 times the data rate, or equal to the data rate, depending on the status of the CD bit. Bit 4 = XBRG: Baud Rate Generator Clock Source. 0: Select INTCLK for the baud rate generator. 1: Select the external receiver clock for the baud rate generator. Bit 3 = CD: Clock Divisor. The status of CD will determine the SCI configuration (synchronous/asynchronous).
0 (odd) 1 (even) 0 (odd) 1 (even)
163/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) BAUD RATE GENERATOR HIGH REGISTER 1: Select Synchronous mode with its programmed (BRGHR) I/O configuration. R252 - Read/Write Bit 6 = INPL: SIN Input Polarity. Reset value: undefined 0: Polarity not inverted. 1: Polarity inverted. 15 8 Note: INPL only affects received data. In AutoEcho mode SOUT = SIN even if INPL is set. In BG15 BG14 BG13 BG12 BG11 BG10 BG9 BG8 Loop-Back mode the state of the INPL bit is irrelevant. BAUD RATE GENERATOR LOW REGISTER (BRGLR) Bit 5 = XCKPL: Receiver Clock Polarity. R253 - Read/Write 0: RXCLK is active on the rising edge. Reset value: undefined 1: RXCLK is active on the falling edge.
7 BG7 BG6 BG5 BG4 BG3 BG2 BG1 0 BG0
Note: XCKPL only affects the receiver clock. In Auto-Echo mode CLKOUT = RXCLK independently of the XCKPL status. In Loop-Back the state of the XCKPL bit is irrelevant. Bit 4 = DCDEN: DCD Input Enable. 0: Disable hardware synchronization. 1: Enable hardware synchronization. Note: When DCDEN is set, RXCLK drives the receiver section only during the active level of the DCD input (DCD works as a gate on RXCLK, informing the MCU that a transmitting device is sending a synchronous frame to it). Bit 3 = DCDPL: DCD Input Polarity. 0: The DCD input is active when LOW. 1: The DCD input is active when HIGH. Note: DCDPL only affects the gating activity of the receiver clock. In Auto-Echo mode RTS = DCD independently of DCDPL. In Loop-Back mode, the state of DCDPL is irrelevant.
Bit 15:0 = Baud Rate Generator MSB and LSB. The Baud Rate generator is a programmable divide by "N" counter which can be used to generate the clocks for the transmitter and/or receiver. This counter divides the clock input by the value in the Baud Rate Generator Register. The minimum baud rate divisor is 2 and the maximum divisor is 216-1. After initialization of the baud rate generator, the divisor value is immediately loaded into the counter. This prevents potentially long random counts on the initial load. If set to 0 or 1, the Baud Rate Generator is stopped. SYNCHRONOUS INPUT CONTROL (SICR) R254 - Read/Write Reset value: 0000 0011 (03h)
7 DCDE DCDP INPEN N L 0
SMEN
INPL XCKPL
X
X
Bit 2 = INPEN: All Input Disable. 0: Enable SIN/RXCLK/DCD inputs. 1: Disable SIN/RXCLK/DCD inputs. Bit 1:0 = "Don't Care"
Bit 7 = SMEN: Synchronous Mode Enable. 0: Disable all features relating to Synchronous mode (the contents of SICR and SOCR are ignored).
164/190
9
ST90158 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont'd) SYNCHRONOUS OUTPUT CONTROL (SOCR) Bit 3 = RTSEN: RTS and SDS Output Enable. 0: Disable the RTS and SDS hardware synchroniR255 - Read/Write sation. Reset value: 0000 0001 (01h) 1: Enable the RTS and SDS hardware synchronisation. 7 0 Notes: - When RTSEN is set, the RTS output becomes OUTP OUTS OCKP OCKS RTSE RTS OUT X active just before the first active edge of CLKL B L B N PL DIS OUT and indicates to target device that the MCU is about to send a synchronous frame; it returns to its stand-by value just after the last active edge Bit 7 = OUTPL: SOUT Output Polarity. of CLKOUT (MSB transmitted). 0: Polarity not inverted. 1: Polarity inverted. - When RTSEN is set, the SDS output becomes active high and indicates to the target device that Note: OUTPL only affects the data sent by the the MCU is about to send the first bit of a syntransmitter section. In Auto-Echo mode SOUT = chronous frame on the Serial Output Pin SIN even if OUTPL=1. In Loop-Back mode, the (SOUT); it returns to low level as soon as the state of OUTPL is irrelevant. second bit is sent on the Serial Output Pin (SOUT). In this way a positive pulse is generated Bit 6 = OUTSB: SOUT Output Stand-By Level. each time that the first bit of a synchronous frame is present on the Serial Output Pin (SOUT). 0: SOUT stand-by level is HIGH. 1: SOUT stand-by level is LOW. Bit 5 = OCKPL: Transmitter Clock Polarity. 0: CLKOUT is active on the rising edge. 1: CLKOUT is active on the falling edge. Note: OCKPL only affects the transmitter clock. In Auto-Echo mode CLKOUT = RXCLK independently of the state of OCKPL. In Loop-Back mode the state of OCKPL is irrelevant. Bit 4 = OCKSB: Transmitter Clock Stand-By Level. 0: The CLKOUT stand-by level is HIGH. 1: The CLKOUT stand-by level is LOW. Bit 2 = RTSPL: RTS Output Polarity. 0: The RTS output is active when LOW. 1: The RTS output is active when HIGH. Note: RTSPL only affects the RTS activity on the output pin. In Auto-Echo mode RTS = DCD independently from the RTSPL value. In Loop-Back mode RTSPL value is 'Don't Care'. Bit 1 = OUTDIS: Disable all outputs. This feature is available on specific devices only (see device pin-out description). When OUTDIS=1, all output pins (if configured in Alternate Function mode) will be put in High Impedance for networking. 0: SOUT/CLKOUT/enabled 1: SOUT/CLKOUT/RTS put in high impedance Bit 0 = "Don't Care"
165/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
9.6 EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D) 9.6.1 Introduction The 8-Channel Analog to Digital Converter (A/D) comprises an input multiplex channel selector feeding a successive approximation converter. Conversion requires 138 INTCLK cycles (of which 84 are required for sampling), conversion time is thus a function of the INTCLK frequency; for instance, for a 20MHz clock rate, conversion of the selected channel requires 6.9s. This time includes the 4.2s required by the built-in Sample and Hold circuitry, which minimizes the need for external components and allows quick sampling of the signal to minimise warping and conversion error. Conversion resolution is 8 bits, with 1 LSB maximum error in the input range between VSS and the analog VDD reference. The converter uses a fully differential analog input configuration for the best noise immunity and precision performance. Two separate supply references are provided to ensure the best possible Figure 86. Block Diagram
n
supply noise rejection. In fact, the converted digital value, is referred to the analog reference voltage which determines the full scale converted value. Naturally, Analog and Digital VSS MUST be common. If analog supplies are not present, input reference voltages are referred to the digital ground and supply. Up to 8 multiplexed Analog Inputs are available, depending on the specific device type. A group of signals can be converted sequentially by simply programming the starting address of the first analog channel to be converted and with the AUTOSCAN feature. Two Analog Watchdogs are provided, allowing continuous hardware monitoring of two input channels. An Interrupt request is generated whenever the converted value of either of these two analog inputs is outside the upper or lower programmed threshold values. The comparison result is stored in a dedicated register.
INTERRUPT UNIT
INT. VECTOR POINTER INT. CONTROL REGISTER
COMPARE LOGIC INTERNAL TRIGGER CONTROL LOGIC EXTERNAL TRIGGER DATA REGISTER 7 DATA REGISTER 6 DATA REGISTER 5 DATA REGISTER 4 DATA REGISTER 3 DATA REGISTER 2 DATA REGISTER 1 DATA REGISTER 0
COMPARE RESULT REGISTER THRESHOLD REGISTER 7U THRESHOLD REGISTER 7L THRESHOLD REGISTER 6U THRESHOLD REGISTER 6L AIN 7 AIN 6 AIN 5 AIN 4 AIN 3 AIN 2 AIN 1 AIN 0
CONVERSION RESULT
ANALOG MUX
SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION A/D CONVERTER
CONTROL REG.
AUTOSCAN LOGIC
VA00223
166/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont'd) Single and continuous conversion modes are available. Conversion may be triggered by an external signal or, internally, by the Multifunction Timer. A Power-Down programmable bit allows the A/D to be set in low-power idle mode. The A/D's Interrupt Unit provides two maskable channels (Analog Watchdog and End of Conversion) with hardware fixed priority, and up to 7 programmable priority levels. CAUTION: A/D INPUT PIN CONFIGURATION The input Analog channel is selected by using the I/O pin Alternate Function setting (PXC2, PXC1, PXC0 = 1,1,1) as described in the I/O ports section. The I/O pin configuration of the port connected to the A/D converter is modified in order to prevent the analog voltage present on the I/O pin from causing high power dissipation across the input buffer. Deselected analog channels should also be maintained in Alternate function configuration for the same reason. 9.6.2 Functional Description 9.6.2.1 Operating Modes Two operating modes are available: Continuous Mode and Single Mode. To enter one of these modes it is necessary to program the CONT bit of the Control Logic Register. Continuous Mode is selected when CONT is set, while Single Mode is selected when CONT is reset. Both modes operate in AUTOSCAN configuration, allowing sequential conversion of the input channels. The number of analog inputs to be converted may be set by software, by setting the number of the first channel to be converted into the Control Register (SC2, SC1, SC0 bits). As each conversion is completed, the channel number is automatically incremented, up to channel 7. For example, if SC2, SC1, SC0 are set to 0,1,1, conversion will proceed from channel 3 to channel 7, whereas, if SC2, SC1, SC0 are set to 1,1,1, only channel 7 will be converted. When the ST bit of the Control Logic Register is set, either by software or by hardware (by an internal or external synchronisation trigger signal), the analog inputs are sequentially converted (from the first selected channel up to channel 7) and the results are stored in the relevant Data Registers. In Single Mode (CONT = "0"), the ST bit is reset by hardware following conversion of channel 7; an End of Conversion (ECV) interrupt request is issued and the A/D waits for a new start event.
In Continuous Mode (CONT = "1"), a continuous conversion flow is initiated by the start event. When conversion of channel 7 is complete, conversion of channel 's' is initiated (where 's' is specified by the setting of the SC2, SC1 and SC0 bits); this will continue until the ST bit is reset by software. In all cases, an ECV interrupt is issued each time channel 7 conversion ends. When channel 'i' is converted ('s' <'i' <7), the related Data Register is reloaded with the new conversion result and the previous value is lost. The End of Conversion (ECV) interrupt service routine can be used to save the current values before a new conversion sequence (so as to create signal sample tables in the Register File or in Memory). 9.6.2.2 Triggering and Synchronisation In both modes, conversion may be triggered by internal or external conditions; externally this may be tied to EXTRG, as an Alternate Function input on an I/O port pin, and internally, it may be tied to INTRG, generated by a Multifunction Timer peripheral. Both external and internal events can be separately masked by programming the EXTG/ INTG bits of the Control Logic Register (CLR). The events are internally ORed, thus avoiding potential hardware conflicts. However, the correct procedure is to enable only one alternate synchronisation condition at any time. The effect either of these synchronisation modes is to set the ST bit by hardware. This bit is reset, in Single Mode only, at the end of each group of conversions. In Continuous Mode, all trigger pulses after the first are ignored. The synchronisation sources must be at a logic low level for at least the duration of one INTCLK cycle and, in Single Mode, the period between trigger pulses must be greater than the total time required for a group of conversions. If a trigger occurs when the ST bit is still set, i.e. when conversion is still in progress, it will be ignored. On devices where two A/D Converters are present they can be triggered from the same source.
Converter A/D 0 A/D 1 External Trigger EXTRG pin On Chip Event (Internal trigger) MFT 0
9.6.2.3 Analog Watchdogs Two internal Analog Watchdogs are available for highly flexible automatic threshold monitoring of external analog signal levels.
167/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont'd) Analog channels 6 and 7 monitor an acceptable voltage level window for the converted analog inputs. The external voltages applied to inputs 6 and 7 are considered normal while they remain below their respective Upper thresholds, and above or at their respective Lower thresholds. When the external signal voltage level is greater than, or equal to, the upper programmed voltage limit, or when it is less than the lower programmed voltage limit, a maskable interrupt request is generated and the Compare Results Register is updated in order to flag the threshold (Upper or Lower) and channel (6 or 7) responsible for the interrupt. The four threshold voltages are user programmable in dedicated registers (08h to 0Bh) of the A/D register page. Only the 4 MSBs of the Compare Results Register are used as flags (the 4 LSBs always return "1" if read), each of the four MSBs being associated with a threshold condition. Following a hardware reset, these flags are reset. During normal A/D operation, the CRR bits are set, in order to flag an out of range condition and are automatically reset by hardware after a software reset of the Analog Watchdog Request flag in the AD_ICR Register. Figure 87. A/D Trigger Source
n
9.6.2.4 Power Down Mode Before enabling an A/D conversion, the POW bit of the Control Logic Register must be set; this must be done at least 60s before the first conversion start, in order to correctly bias the analog section of the converter circuitry. When the A/D is not required, the POW bit may be reset in order to reduce the total power consumption. This is the reset configuration, and this state is also selected automatically when the ST9 is placed in Halt Mode (following the execution of the halt instruction).
Analog Voltage Upper threshold Normal Area (Window Guarded) Lower threshold
168/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont'd) Figure 88. Application Example: Analog Watchdog used in Motorspeed Control
n
9.6.3 Interrupts The A/D provides two interrupt sources: - End of Conversion - Analog Watchdog Request The A/D Interrupt Vector Register (AD_IVR) provides hardware generated flags which indicate the interrupt source, thus allowing automatic selection of the correct interrupt service routine.
Analog Watchdog Request 7 X X X X X X 0 0 0
Lower Word Address
End of Conv. Request
7 X X X X X X 1
0 0
Upper Word Address
The A/D Interrupt vector should be programmed by the User to point to the first memory location in the Interrupt Vector table containing the base address of the four byte area of the interrupt vector table in which the address of the A/D interrupt service routines are stored. The Analog Watchdog Interrupt Pending bit (AWD, AD_ICR.6), is automatically set by hardware
whenever any of the two guarded analog inputs go out of range. The Compare Result Register (CRR) tracks the analog inputs which exceed their programmed thresholds. When two requests occur simultaneously, the Analog Watchdog Request has priority over the End of Conversion request, which is held pending. The Analog Watchdog Request requires the user to poll the Compare Result Register (CRR) to determine which of the four thresholds has been exceeded. The threshold status bits are set to flag an out of range condition, and are automatically reset by hardware after a software reset of the Analog Watchdog Request flag in the AD_ICR Register. The interrupt pending flags, ECV and AWD, should be reset by the user within the interrupt service routine. Setting either of these two bits by software will cause an interrupt request to be generated. 9.6.3.1 Register Mapping It is possible to have two independent A/D converters in the same device. In this case they are named A/D 0 and A/D 1. If the device has one A/D converter it uses the register addresses of A/D 0. The register pages are the following:
A/Dn A/D 0 A/D 1 Register Page 63 61
169/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont'd) 9.6.4 Register Description DATA REGISTERS (DiR) The conversion results for the 8 available channels are loaded into the 8 Data registers following conversion of the corresponding analog input. CHANNEL 0 DATA REGISTER (D0R) R240 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 D0.7 D0.6 D0.5 D0.4 D0.3 D0.2 D0.1 0 D0.0
7 D3.7 D3.6 D3.5 D3.4 D3.3 D3.2 D3.1
0 D3.0
CHANNEL 4 DATA REGISTER (D4R) R244 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 D4.7 D4.6 D4.5 D4.4 D4.3 D4.2 D4.1 0 D4.0
Bit 7:0 = D4.[7:0]: Channel 4 Data CHANNEL 5 DATA REGISTER (D5R) R245 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 0 D5.6 D5.5 D5.4 D5.3 D5.2 D5.1 D5.0
Bit 7:0 = D0.[7:0]: Channel 0 Data. CHANNEL 1 DATA REGISTER (D1R) R241 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 D1.7 D1.6 D1.5 D1.4 D1.3 D1.2 D1.1 0 D1.0
D5.7
Bit 7:0 = D5.[7:0]: Channel 5 Data. CHANNEL 6 DATA REGISTER (D6R) R246 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 0 D6.6 D6.5 D6.4 D6.3 D6.2 D6.1 D6.0
Bit 7:0 = D1.[7:0]: Channel 1 Data. CHANNEL 2 DATA REGISTER (D2R) R242 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 D2.7 D2.6 D2.5 D2.4 D2.3 D2.2 D2.1 0 D2.0
D6.7
Bit 7:0 = D6.[7:0]: Channel 6 Data CHANNEL 7 DATA REGISTER (D7R) R247 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 D7.7 D7.6 D7.5 D7.4 D7.3 D7.2 D7.1 0 D7.0
Bit 7:0 = D2.[7:0]: Channel 2 Data. CHANNEL 3 DATA REGISTER (D3R) R243 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined Bit 7:0 = D3.[7:0]: Channel 3 Data.
170/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont'd) CHANNEL 6 LOWER THRESHOLD REGISTER (LT6R) R248 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 0 LT6.7 LT6.6 LT6.5 LT6.4 LT6.3 LT6.2 LT6.1 LT6.0
CHANNEL 7 UPPER THRESHOLD REGISTER (UT7R) R251 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 UT7. 7 UT7. 6 UT7. UT7. 5 4 UT7. UT7. 3 2 UT7. 1 0 UT7. 0
Bit 7:0 = LT6.[7:0]: Channel 6 Lower Threshold User-defined lower threshold value for Channel 6, to be compared with the conversion results. CHANNEL 7 LOWER THRESHOLD REGISTER (LT7R) R249 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 0
Bit 7:0 = UT7.[7:0]: Channel 7 Upper Threshold value User-defined upper threshold value for Channel 7, to be compared with the conversion results. COMPARE RESULT REGISTER (CRR) R252 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: 0000 1111 (0Fh)
7 C7U C6U C7L C6L 1 1 1 0 1
LT7.7 LT7.6 LT7.5 LT7.4 LT7.3 LT7.2 LT7.1 LT7.0
Bit 7:0 = LT7.[7:0]: Channel 7 Lower Threshold. User-defined lower threshold value for Channel 7, to be compared with the conversion results. CHANNEL 6 UPPER THRESHOLD REGISTER (UT6R) R250 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: undefined
7 UT6. 7 UT6. UT6. 6 5 UT6. 4 UT6. UT6. 3 2 0 UT6. UT6. 1 0
These bits are set by hardware and cleared by software. Bit 7 = C7U: Compare Reg 7 Upper threshold 0: Threshold not reached 1: Channel 7 converted data is greater than or equal to UT7R threshold register value. Bit 6 = C6U: Compare Reg 6Upper threshold 0: Threshold not reached 1: Channel 6 converted data is greater than or equal to UT6R threshold register value. Bit 5 = C7L: Compare Reg 7 Lower threshold 0: Threshold not reached 1: Channel 7 converted data is less than the LT7R threshold register value. Bit 4 = C6L: Compare Reg 6 Lower threshold 0: Threshold not reached 1: Channel 6 converted data is less than the LT6R threshold register value. Bit 3:0 = Reserved, returns "1" when read. Note: Any software reset request generated by writing to the AD_ICR, will also cause all the compare status bits to be cleared.
Bit 7:0 = UT6.[7:0]: Channel 6 Upper Threshold value. User-defined upper threshold value for Channel 6, to be compared with the conversion results.
171/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont'd) CONTROL LOGIC REGISTER (CLR) The Control Logic Register (CLR) manages the A/D converter logic. Writing to this register will cause the current conversion to be aborted and the autoscan logic to be re-initialized. CONTROL LOGIC REGISTER (CLR) R253 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7 SC2 SC1 SC0 EXT CON INTG POW G T 0 ST
however, the correct procedure is to enable only one alternate synchronization input at a time. Note: The effect of either synchronization mode is to set the START/STOP bit, which is reset by hardware when in SINGLE mode, at the end of each sequence of conversions. Requirements: The External Synchronisation Input must receive a low level pulse longer than an INTCLK period and, for both External and On-Chip Event synchronisation, the repetition period must be greater than the time required for the selected sequence of conversions. Bit 2 = POW: Power Up/Power Down. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Power down mode: all power-consuming logic is disabled, thus selecting a low power idle mode. 1: Power up mode: the A/D converter logic and analog circuitry is enabled. Bit 1 = CONT: Continuous/Single. 0: Single Mode: a single sequence of conversions is initiated whenever an external (or internal) trigger occurs, or when the ST bit is set by software. 1: Continuous Mode: the first sequence of conversions is started, either by software (by setting the ST bit), or by hardware (on an internal or external trigger, depending on the setting of the INTG and EXTG bits); a continuous conversion sequence is then initiated. Bit 0 = ST: Start/Stop. 0: Stop conversion. When the A/D converter is running in Single Mode, this bit is hardware reset at the end of a sequence of conversions. 1: Start a sequence of conversions.
Bit 7:5 = SC[2:0]: Start Conversion Address. These 3 bits define the starting analog input channel (Autoscan mode). The first channel addressed by SC[2:0] is converted, then the channel number is incremented for the successive conversion, until channel 7 (111) is converted. When SC2, SC1 and SC0 are all set, only channel 7 will be converted. Bit 4 = EXTG: External Trigger Enable. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: External trigger disabled. 1: External trigger enabled. Allows a conversion sequence to be started on the subsequent edge of the external signal applied to the EXTRG pin (when enabled as an Alternate Function). Bit 3 = INTG: Internal Trigger Enable. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Internal trigger disabled. 1: Internal trigger enabled. Allows a conversion sequence to be started, synchronized by an internal signal (On-chip Event signal) from a Multifunction Timer peripheral. Both External and Internal Trigger inputs are internally ORed, thus avoiding Hardware conflicts;
172/190
9
ST90158 - EIGHT-CHANNEL ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont'd) INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (AD_ICR) R254 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: 0000 1111 (0Fh)
7 ECV AWD ECI AWDI X PL2 PL1 0 PL0
Bit 4 = AWDI: Analog Watchdog Interrupt Enable. This bit masks or enables the Analog Watchdog interrupt request. 0: Mask Analog Watchdog interrupts 1: Enable Analog Watchdog interrupts Bit 3 = Reserved. Bit 2:0 = PL[2:0]: A/D Interrupt Priority Level. These three bits allow selection of the Interrupt priority level for the A/D. INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (AD_IVR) R255 - Read/Write Register Page: 63 Reset Value: xxxx xx10 (x2h)
7 V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 V2 W1 0 0
Bit 7 = ECV: End of Conversion. This bit is set by hardware after a group of conversions is completed. It must be reset by the user, before returning from the Interrupt Service Routine. Setting this bit by software will cause a software interrupt request to be generated. 0: No End of Conversion event occurred 1: An End of Conversion event occurred Bit 6 = AWD: Analog Watchdog. This is automatically set by hardware whenever either of the two monitored analog inputs goes out of bounds. The threshold values are stored in registers F8h and FAh for channel 6, and in registers F9h and FBh for channel 7 respectively. The Compare Result Register (CRR) keeps track of the analog inputs exceeding the thresholds. The AWD bit must be reset by the user, before returning from the Interrupt Service Routine. Setting this bit by software will cause a software interrupt request to be generated. 0: No Analog Watchdog event occurred 1: An Analog Watchdog event occurred Bit 5 = ECI: End of Conversion Interrupt Enable. This bit masks the End of Conversion interrupt request. 0: Mask End of Conversion interrupts 1: Enable End of Conversion interrupts
Bit 7:2 = V[7:2]: A/D Interrupt Vector. This vector should be programmed by the User to point to the first memory location in the Interrupt Vector table containing the starting addresses of the A/D interrupt service routines. Bit 1 = W1: Word Select. This bit is set and cleared by hardware, according to the A/D interrupt source. 0: Interrupt source is the Analog Watchdog, pointing to the lower word of the A/D interrupt service block (defined by V[7:2]). 1:Interrupt source is the End of Conversion interrupt, thus pointing to the upper word. Note: When two requests occur simultaneously, the Analog Watchdog Request has priority over the End of Conversion request, which is held pending. Bit 0 = Reserved. Forced by hardware to 0.
173/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
10 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
This product contains devices to protect the inputs against damage due to high static voltages, however it is advisable to take normal precaution to avoid application of any voltage higher than the specified maximum rated voltages. For proper operation it is recommended that VI and VO be higher than VSS and lower than V DD. Reliability is enhanced if unused inputs are connected to an appropriate logic voltage level (VDD or VSS). ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol VDD AVDD AVSS VI VAIN VO TSTG IINJ Supply Voltage A/D Converter Analog Reference A/D Converter VSS Input Voltage Analog Input Voltage (A/D Converter) Output Voltage Storage Temperature Pin Injection Current Digital and Analog Input Maximum Accumulated Pin injection Current in the device Parameter Value - 0.3 to 7.0 VDD -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 VSS - 0.3 to VDD +0.3 VSS -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V SSA -0.3 to VDDA + 0.3 - 0.3 to VDD +0.3 - 55 to + 150 -5 to +5 -50 to +50 V V V C mA mA Unit V V
Power Considerations.The average chip-junction temperature, TJ, in Celsius can be obtained from: TJ =TA + PD x RthJA Where: TA = Ambient Temperature. RthJA = Package thermal resistance (junction-to ambient). PINT + PPORT. PD = PINT = IDD x VDD (chip internal power). PPORT =Port power dissipation determined by the user)
Note: Stresses above those listed as "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these conditions is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. All voltages are referenced to VSS
PACKAGE THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol RthJA Parameter Thermal junction to ambient Package TQFP80 PQFP80 Value 40 40 Unit C/W
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol TA V DD Operating Temperature Operating Supply Voltage (ROM) Operating Supply Voltage (OTP) Operating Supply Voltage (OTP Low Voltage version) fINTCLK Internal Clock Frequency @ 4.5V - 5.5V Internal Clock Frequency @ 2.7V - 3.3V (ROM) Internal Clock Frequency @ 2.85V - 3.15V (OTP Low Voltage version) Parameter Value Min. -40 2.7 4.5 2.85(1) 0(2) Max. 85 5.5 5.5 3.15(1) 16 14 14 MHz V Unit C
Note 1. Operating temperature 0-70 C Note 2. 1MHz when A/D is used
174/190
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (VDD = 5V 10%, TA = -40C + 85C, unless otherwise specified)(1)
Symbol VIHCK VILCK VIH Parameter Clock Input High Level Clock Input Low Level Input High Level Test Conditio ns External Clock External Clock TTL CMOS Schmitt Trigger TTL V IL VIHRS VILRS VHYRS VOH VOL IWPU ILKIO ILKRS ILKA/D ILKAP ILKOS Input Low Level RESET Input High Level RESET Input Low Level RESET Input Hysteresis Output High Level Output Low Level Weak Pull-up Current Push Pull, Iload = - 0.8mA Push Pull or Open Drain, Iload = 1.6mA Bidirectional Weak Pull-up, VOL = 0V Input/Tri-State, 0V < VIN < VDD 0V < VIN < VDD 0V < VIN < 0.8V 0V < VIN < VDD - 50 - 10 - 30 -3 - 10 - 200 CMOS Schmitt Trigger Value Min. 0.7 VDD - 0.3 2.0 0.7 VDD 0.7 VDD - 0.3 - 0.3 - 0.3 0.7 VDD -0.3 0.3 VDD - 0.8 0.4 - 420 + 10 + 30 +3 + 10 3 Typ. Max. VDD + 0.3 0.3 V DD VDD + 0.3 VDD + 0.3 VDD + 0.3 0.8
(2)
Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V A A A A A A
0.3 V DD 0.8
(2)
VDD + 0.3 0.3 V DD 1.5
I/O Pin Input Leakage RESET Pin Input Leakage A/D Conv. Input Leakage Active Pull-up Input Leakage OSCIN Pin Input Leakage
Note 1: All I/O Ports are configured in bidirectional weak pull-up mode with no DC load external clock pin (OSCIN) is driven by square wave external clock. No peripheral working. Note 2: VDD = 3V 10% VILMAX = 0.4 V (TTL and Schmitt trigger).
175/190
1
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
AC TEST CONDITIONS
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (VDD = 5V 10%, TA = -40C + 85C, INTCLK = 16 MHz unless otherwise specified)1
Symbol IDDRUN IDDWFI IDDLPWFI IHALT Parameter Run Mode Current, PLL on WFI Mode Current, PLL on Low Power WFI Mode Current HALT Mode Current
2
INTCLK 16 MHz 16 MHz 4 MHz/32
ROM devices Typ. 32 11 1.0 3 Max. 34 12 1.2 10
OTP devices Typ. 50 16 1.3 3 Max. 55 18 1.6 10
Unit mA mA mA A
Note 1: All I/O Ports are configured in bidirectional weak pull-up mode with no DC load, external clock pin (OSCIN) is driven by square wave external clock. Note 2: TA = 25C. At TA 85 C the max. value is 25 A.
(VDD = 3V 10%, TA = 0C + 70C, , INTCLK = 14 MHz unless otherwise specified)
Symbol IDDRUN IDDWFI IDDLPWFI IHALT Parameter Run Mode Current, PLL on WFI Mode Current, PLL on Low Power WFI Mode Current HALT Mode Current INTCLK 14 MHz 14 MHz 4 MHz/32 ROM devices Typ. 13 5 0.3 2 Max. 14.5 6.5 0.4 5 OTP LV devices (1) Typ. 21 7 0.4 2 Max. 23.5 8.5 0.5 5 Unit mA mA mA A
Note 1: VDD = 3V5%
176/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EXTERNAL BUS TIMING TABLE (VDD = 5V 10%, TA = -40C + 85C, Cload = 50pF, INTCLK = 16MHz, unless otherwise specified)
N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Symbol TsA (AS) ThAS (A) TdAS (DR) TwAS TdAz (DS) TwDS TdDSR (DR) ThDR (DS) TdDS (A) Parameter Address Set-up Time before AS Address Hold Time after AS AS to Data Available (read) AS Low Pulse Width Address Float to DS DS Low Pulse Width DS to Data Valid Delay (read) Data to DS Hold Time (read) DS to Address Active Delay DS to AS Delay R/W Set-up Time before AS DS to R/W and Address Not Valid Delay Write Data Valid to DS Delay Write Data Set-up before DS Data Hold Time after DS (write) Address Valid to Data Valid Delay (read) AS to DS Delay Value (Note) Formula Tck*Wa+TckH-9 TckL-4 Tck*(Wd+1)+3 Tck*Wa+TckH-5 0 Tck*Wd+TckH-5 Tck*Wd+TckH+4 7 TckL+11 TckL-4 Tck*Wa+TckH-17 TckL-1 -16 Tck*Wd+TckH-16 TckL-3 Tck*(Wa+Wd+1)+TckH-7 TckL-6 26 7 43 28 15 31 -16 16 29 86 27 0 27 35 Min. Max. 23 28 65 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
10 TdDS (AS) 11 TsR/W (AS) 12 TdDSR (R/W) 13 TdDW (DSW) 14 TsD(DSW) 15 ThDS (DW) 16 TdA (DR) 17 TdAs (DS)
Note: The value in the left hand column shows the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period, prescale value and number of wait cycles inserted. The values in the right hand two columns show the timing minimum and maximum for an external clock at 24 MHz divided by 2, prescaler value of zero and zero wait status. Legend: Tck = INTCLK period = OSCIN period when OSCIN is not divided by 2; 2*OSCIN period when OSCIN is divided by 2; OSCIN period / PLL factor when the PLL is enabled TckH = INTCLK high pulse width (normally = Tck/2, except when INTCLK = OSCIN, in which case it is OSCIN high pulse width) TckL = INTCLK low pulse width (normally = Tck/2, except when INTCLK = OSCIN, in which case it is OSCIN low pulse width) P = clock prescaling value (=PRS; division factor = 1+P) Wa = wait cycles on AS; = max (P, programmed wait cycles in EMR2, requested wait cycles with WAIT) Wd = wait cycles on DS; = max (P, programmed wait cycles in WCR, requested wait cycles with WAIT)
177/190
1
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EXTERNAL BUS TIMING
178/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING TABLE (VDD = 5V 10%, TA = -40C +85C, Cload = 50pF, INTCLK = 12MHz, Push-pull output configuration, unless otherwise specified)
Value (Note) N Symbol Parameter Low Level Minimum Pulse Width in Rising Edge Mode High Level Minimum Pulse Width in Rising Edge Mode High Level Minimum Pulse Width in Falling Edge Mode Low Level Minimum Pulse Width in Falling Edge Mode OSCIN Divided by 2 Min. 2TpC+12 2TpC+12 2TpC+12 2TpC+12 OSCIN Not Divided by 2 Min. TpC+12 TpC+12 TpC+12 TpC+12 Min. 95 95 95 95 Max. Unit
1 2 3 4
TwLR TwHR TwHF TwLF
ns ns ns ns
Note: The value left hand two columns show the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period, prescale value and number of wait cycles inserted. The value right hand two columns show the timing minimum and maximum for an external clock at 24 MHz divided by 2, prescale value of zero and zero wait status.
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING
179/190
1
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SPI TIMING TABLE (VDD = 5V 10%, TA = -40C + 85C, Cload = 50pF, INTCLK = 12MHz, Output Alternate Function set as Push-pull)
N 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol TsDI ThDI (1) TdOV ThDO TwSKL TwSKH Parameter Input Data Set-up Time Input Data Hold Time SCK to Output Data Valid Output Data Hold Time SCK Low Pulse Width SCK High Pulse Width -20 300 300 Value Min. 100 1/2 TpC+100 100 Max. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note: TpC is the OSCIN Clock period.
SPI TIMING
180/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
WATCHDOG TIMING TABLE (VDD = 5V 10%, TA = -40C + 85C, Cload = 50pF, INTCLK = 12MHz, Push-pull output configuration, unless otherwise specified )
N 1 2 3 4 Symbol TwWDOL TwWDOH TwWDIL TwWDIH Parameter WDOUT Low Pulse Width WDOUT High Pulse Width WDIN High Pulse Width WDIN Low Pulse Width Values Min. 620 620 350 350 Max. ns ns ns ns Unit
WATCHDOG TIMING
181/190
1
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A/D EXTERNAL TRIGGER TIMING TABLE
N 1 2 3 4 Symbol TwLOW TwHIGH TwEXT Td STR Parameter External trigger pulse width External trigger pulse distance External trigger active edges distance (1) EXTRG falling edge and first conversion start OSCIN Divided by 2 (2) Min. 2 x Tpc 2 x Tpc 276n x Tpc Tpc 3x Tpc Max. OSCIN Not Divided by 2 (2) Min. Tpc Tpc 138n x Tpc .5 x Tpc 1.5 x Tpc Max. Value (3) Min. 83 83 n x 11.5 41.5 Max. 125 ns ns s ns Unit
A/D EXTERNAL TRIGGER TIMING
182/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A/D INTERNAL TRIGGER TIMING TABLE
N Symbol Parameter Internal trigger pulse width Internal trigger pulse distance Internal trigger active edges distance (1) Internal delay between INTRG rising edge and first conversion start OSCIN Divided by 2 (2) Min. 1 2 Tw HIGH TwLOW TwEXT Tpc 6 x Tpc 276n x Tpc Max. OSCIN Not Divided by 2 (2) Min. .5 x Tpc 3 x Tpc 138n x Tpc Max. Value (3) Min. 41.5 250 Max. ns ns s Unit
3
n x 11.5
-
4
TwSTR
Tpc
3 x Tpc
.5 x Tpc
1.5 x Tpc
41.5
125
ns
A/D INTERNAL TRIGGER TIMING
INTRG
2
1
3
ST (start conversion bit)
4
4
VR0A1401
183/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A/D CHANNEL ENABLE TIMING TABLE
N 1 Symbol TwEXT Parameter CEn Pulse width (1) OSCIN Divided by 2 (2) Min. 276n x Tpc Max. OSCIN Not Divided by 2 (2) Min. 138n x Tpc Max. Value (3) Min. n x 11.5 Max. s Unit
Notes: 1. n = number of autoscanned channels (1 < n < 8) 2. Variable clock (Tpc = OSCIN clock period) 3. INTCLK = 12MHz
A/D CHANNEL ENABLE TIMING
184/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A/D ANALOG SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 4.5V TO 5.0 V)
Parameter Conversion time Sample time Power-up time Resolution Monotonicity No missing codes Zero input reading Full scale reading Offset error Gain error Diff. Non Linearity Int. Non Linearity Absolute Accuracy A VCC/AVSS Resistance Input Resistance Hold Capacitance Input Leakage 13.5 12 16 8 .5 .5 .3 .2 00 FF 1 1 .5 1 1 11 15 30 3 8 Typical Minimum 138 87.51 60 8 GUARANTEED GUARANTEED Hex Hex LSBs LSBs LSBs LSBs LSBs K K pF A (3) (1,4) (4) (4) (4) (4)(5) Maximum Units (1) INTCLK INTCLK s bits Notes (2)
Notes: 1. "LSBs", as used here, has a value of AVDD/256 2. Including sample time 3. It must be intended as the internal series resistance before the sampling capacitor 4. This is a typical expected value, but not a tested production parameter. If V(i) is the value of the i-th transition level (0 < i < 254), the performance of the A/D converter has been valued as follows: OFFS ET ERROR= deviation between the actual V(0) and the ideal V(0) (=1/2 LSB) GAIN ERROR= deviation between the actual V(254) and the ideal V(254) (=AVCC-3/2 LSB) DNL ERROR= max {[V(i) - V(i-1)]/LSB - 1} INL ERROR= max {[V(i) - V(0)]/LSB - i} ABS. ACCURA CY= overall max conversion error S/N ratio has been valued by sampling a sinusoidal input waveform and then calculating its Fast Fourier Transform. 2. Absolute accuracy: 2.5 LSB at 3V.
185/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER UNIT EXTERNAL TIMING TABLE
N Symbol 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TwCTW TwCTD TwAED TwGW Tw LBA Tw LAB TwAD Tw OWD Parameter External clock/trigger pulse width External clock/trigger pulse distance Distance between two active edges Gate pulse width Distance between TINB pulse edge and the following TINA pulse edge Distance between TINA pulse edge and the following TINB pulse edge Distance between two TxINA pulses Minimum output pulse width/distance OSCIN Divided by 2 (3) 2n x Tpc 2n x Tpc 6 x Tpc 12 x Tpc 2 x Tpc 0 0 6 x Tpc 3 x Tpc OSCIN Not Divided by 2 (3) n x Tpc n x Tpc 3 x Tpc 6 x Tpc Tpc Value (4) Min. n x 83 n x 83 249 498 83 0 0 249 Max. Unit Note ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 2 2 2 1 1
Notes: 1. n = 1 if the input is rising OR falling edge sensitive n = 3 if the input is rising AND falling edge sensitive 2. In Autodiscrimination mode 3. Variable clock ( Tpc = OSCIN period ) 4. INTCLK = 12 MHz
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER UNIT EXTERNAL TIMING
186/190
9
ST90158 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SCI TIMING TABLE (VDD = 5V 10%, TA = - 40C to +85C, Cload = 50pF, INTCLK = 12MHz, Output Alternate Function set as Push-pull)
N Symbol FRxCKIN TwRxCKIN FTxCKIN TwTxCKIN 1 2 3 TsDS TdD1 TdD2 Parameter Frequency of RxCKIN RxCKIN shortest pulse Frequency of TxCKIN TxCKIN shortest pulse DS (Data Stable) before rising edge of RxCKIN TxCKIN to Data out delay Time CLKOUT to Data out delay Time 1 x mode 16 x mode 1 x mode 16 x mode 1 x mode 16 x mode 1 x mode 16 x mode 1 x mode reception with RxCKIN 1 x mode transmission with external clock C load <100pF 1 x mode transmission with CLKOUT 350 4 TCK 2 TCK TPC /2 2.5 TPC 4 TCK 2 TCK FCK /8 FCK /4 Conditio n Value Min. Max. FCK /8 FCK /4 Unit Hz Hz s s Hz Hz s s ns ns ns
Note: FCK = 1/TCK
SCI TIMING
187/190
1
ST90158 - GENERAL INFORMATION
11 GENERAL INFORMATION
11.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA Figure 89. 80-Pin Thin Plastic Quad Flat Package
0.10mm .004 seating plane Dim A A1 A2 b C D D1 E E1 e K L L1 N 80 0 0.05 mm Min Typ Max 1.60 0.15 0.002 Min inches Typ Max 0.063 0.006
1.35 1.40 1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057 0.22 0.32 0.38 0.009 0.013 0.015 0.09 16.00 14.00 16.00 14.00 0.65 3.5 0.75 1.00 ND 20 0 0.20 0.004 0.630 0.551 0.630 0.551 0.026 3.5 0.75 0.039 NE 20 0.008
0.45 0.60 0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030 Number of Pins
TQFP80
11.2 80-PIN PLASTIC QUAD FLAT PACKAGE
0.10mm .004 seating plane Dim A A1 A2 B C D D1 D3 E E1 E3 e K L L1 N 80 0 1.60 ND 24 0.25 0.30 0.13 mm Min Typ Max 3.40 0.010 0.45 0.012 0.23 0.005 0.018 0.009 Min inches Typ Max 0.134
2.55 2.80 3.05 0.100 0.110 0.120
22.95 23.20 23.45 0.904 0.913 0.923 19.90 20.00 20.10 0.783 0.787 0.791 18.40 0.724 16.95 17.20 17.45 0.667 0.677 0.687 13.90 14.00 14.10 0.547 0.551 0.555 12.00 0.80 7 0.063 NE 16 0.472 0.031
0.65 0.80 0.95 0.026 0.031 0.037 Number of Pins
PQFP080
188/190
1
ST90158 - GENERAL INFORMATION
80-PIN CERAMIC QUAD FLAT PACKAGE
Dim A A1 B C D D1 D3 E E1 E3 e G G1 G2 CQFP080 L N 0.20 mm Min Typ Max 3.24 0.008 Min inches Typ Max 0.128
0.30 0.35 0.45 0.012 0.014 0.018 0.13 0.15 0.23 0.005 0.006 0.009 23.35 23.90 24.45 0.919 0.941 0.963 19.57 20.00 20.43 0.770 0.787 0.804 18.40 0.724 17.35 17.90 18.45 0.683 0.705 0.726 13.61 14.00 14.39 0.536 0.551 0.567 12.00 0.80 0.472 0.031
13.75 14.00 14.25 0.541 0.551 0.561 19.75 20.00 20.25 0.778 0.787 0.797 1.06 0.35 0.80 0.042 0.014 0.031 80
Number of Pins
11.3 ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number ST90135M4Q6 ST90135M5Q6 ST90135M6Q6 ST90158M7Q6 ST90158M9Q6 ST90158M9T1 ST90E158M9G0 ST90E158M9LVG0 ST90T158M9Q6 ST90T158M9LVQ1 ST90T158M9LVT1 ST90R158Q6 ST90R158T1 Program Memory (Bytes) 16K ROM 24K ROM 32K ROM 48K ROM 64K ROM 64K EPROM RAM (Bytes) 512 768 1K 1.5K 2K 2K 0C +70C + 25C -40C +85C 64K OTP ROMless ROMless 2K 2K 2K 0C +70C -40C +85C 0C +70C 3V @ 14 MHz 5V @ 16MHz 3V @ 14 MHz 5V @ 16MHz 3V @ 14 MHz 5V @ 16MHz 3V @ 14MHz TQFP80 CQFP80-W CQFP80-W PQFP80 PQFP80 TQFP80 PQFP80 TQFP80 -40C +85C 5V @ 16MHz 3V @ 14 MHz PQFP80 Temp. Range Operating Supply Package
189/190
9
ST90158 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Notes:
Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, STMicroelectronics assumes no responsibility for the consequences of use of such information nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of STMicroelectronics. Specifications mentioned in this publication are subject to change without notice. This publication supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. STMicroelectronics products are not authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems without the express written approval of STMicroelectronics. The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics (c)2000 STMicroelectronics - All Rights Reserved. Purchase of I2 C Components by STMicroelectronics conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent. Rights to use these components in an I2C system is granted provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips. STMicroelectronics Group of Companies Australia - Brazil - China - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Italy - Japan - Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Singapore - Spain Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - U.S.A. http:// www.st.com
190/190
1

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of ST90135

	To Download ST90135 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .